Apollo Service Manual PDF

APOLLO 0051
Service Manual
Version 30 April 2008 (Rev. 8)
APOLLO 0051
Service Manual
This Manual belongs to Apollo equipment serial No. ……………………
Version 30 April 2008 (Rev. 8)

SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history
Revision history
Rev. Date Page/s Modification description
0 14.01.05 - Document approval.

1 29.03.05 6-2, 6-14, 6-44, 17-5, A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout and
from 22-129 to 22-145 wiring diagram update.
Parameter 74 update in Inverter setting.
Description of basement grubs
regulation.
(Ref. RDM 6040, RDM 6078, RDM 6092)
2 27.04.05 4-6, 4-11, 6-44, 7-1, 8-1, Change of min and max height of
8-3, 9-2, 11-10, 11-13, compressor cone with respect to table
11-16, 11-25, 11-26, 13-6, top.
13-10, da 22-9 a 22-45, Release of SW Version 1.03 (correcting
22-49, da 22-69 a 22-77, some minor bugs and introducing some
da 22-81 a 22-95 improvements).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
(Ref. RDM 6008, RDM 6103, RDM 6104)
3 14.04.06 All Release of "All Digital" version.

Release of "C-CSA-US" version.
Release flat tabletop version.
Software parameters updating.
Release of SW version 1.05 (HOLD
function active message on the display,
collimator additional filter function,
Table Top double height possibilities
from floor).
Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
Spare Parts chapter added.
(Ref. RDM 6292, RDM 6340, RDM 6360)
4 17.07.06 from 4-2 to 4-6, 4-8, Release of SW version 1.06 on cabinet

8-1, 11-14, 11-16, 11-21, CPU board and SW version 1.04 on
11-25, 11-37, 11-42, console CPU board (4 Tomo speed, SID
14-4, 18-3, 20-3, 22-3, and Layers displayed in inch,
from 22-9 to 22-45, compression force displayed in lbs,
22-49, from 22-81 to 22-95, 43x35 cassette division 4:1).
22-129, 22-131, Additional Collimator Filters board A16
from 22-155 to 22-159, 23-6 (optional) added.
Table Top Control board A17 added.
(Ref. RDM 6414, RDM 6467)
5 25.10.06 11-5, 11-6, 11-7 Release of SW version 1.07 on cabinet

11-10, 20-37, CPU board (added cells 244 and 245).
from 22-9 to 22-49, Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
23-2, 23-4, 23-6, 23-7, Spare Parts update.
23-10, 23-11, 23-14, (Ref. RDM 6380, RDM 6495, RDM 6497,
23-16, 23-28 RDM 6503, RDM 6518, RDM 6529)
(Rev. 8) APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Revision history
Rev. Date Page/s Modification description
6 20.06.07 from i to vi, 3-6, Release of SW version 1.08 on cabinet

from 5-1 to 5-8, 6-5, 8-3, CPU board (added cell 243).
10-5, 10-6, 10-7, Added automatic collimator with
from 10-14 to 10-28, square/rectangular field type Ralco.
from 11-10 to 11-13, 11-26, Release of SW version 1.09 on cabinet
11-27, 11-28, 11-58, CPU board (automatic collimation on
13-12, Wall Bucky).
from 20-11 to 20-46, Added floor top plate.
from 22-9 to 22-45, 22-79, Removed Headrest from standard
from 22-71 to 22-77, 22-159, accessories.
23-2, 23-4, 23-12, Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
23-14, 23-16, Spare Parts update.
23-19, 23-20, 23-21, 23-23, (Ref. RDM 6553, RDM 6569, RDM 6573,
23-24, 23-25, 23-28, 23-29 RDM 6617, RDM 6636, RDM 6640, RDM 6645,
RDM 6646, RDM 6649)
7 10.09.07 from i to vi, 4-2, 4-3, Release of SW version 1.10 on cabinet

4-5, 4-11, 4-12, CPU board (introducing
from 5-4 to 5-10, 1100 ÷ 1800 mm / 43.3" ÷ 70.9" SID).
10-2, from 10-5 to 10-30, Release of new patient footrest for flat
11-8, 11-9, tabletop.
from 11-13 to 11-16, 11-25, Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
11-29, from 11-32 to 11-34, Spare Parts update.
11-41, 16-6, 19-4, 19-5, (Ref. RDM 6671, RDM 6696, RDM 6699)
20-6, 20-37,
from 22-49 to 22-67,
23-4, 23-24, 23-26, 23-29
8 30.04.08 v, 10-7, 11-9,13-7, Release of SW version 1.11 on cabinet
from 19-8 to 19-10, CPU board (angulation movement
22-47, 22-49, command management with
from 22-79 to 22-95, 22-159, compressor in field).
23-2, 23-4, 23-5, 23-20, C-CSA-US collimator with index added.
23-21, 23-23, 23-24 Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
Spare Parts update.
(Ref. RDM 6736, RDM 6755, RDM 6791,
RDM 6793, RDM 6804, RDM 6807)
APOLLO (Rev. 8)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1-1
1.1 Symbols used in this manual............................................................... 1-1
1.2 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service ................ 1-2
2 SAFETY ASPECTS 2-1

2.1 Warnings ............................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Radioprotection warnings .................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Environmental risks and disposal........................................................ 2-8
2.4 Used symbols ...................................................................................... 2-9
3 DESCRIPTION 3-1
3.1 ID labels .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 ID labels "CE" version.......................................................................3-2
3.1.2 ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version ............................................3-3
3.2 Description .......................................................................................... 3-4
4 TECHNICAL DATA 4-1

4.1 Technical features ............................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Formats division table in centimeters .................................................. 4-8
4.3 Formats division table in inches .......................................................... 4-9
4.4 Standards and regulations................................................................. 4-10
4.5 Dimensions........................................................................................ 4-11
4.5.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1") ........................... 4-11
4.5.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") ........................... 4-12
5 PRE-INSTALLATION 5-1
5.1 Space requirements ............................................................................. 5-4
5.2 Electrical provisions ............................................................................ 5-8
5.3 Adaptation to the mains voltage........................................................... 5-9
5.4 Environmental conditions.................................................................... 5-9
6 INSTALLATION 6-1
6.1 Base positioning with beam and column.............................................. 6-2
6.2 Assembly of the Tube support arm ...................................................... 6-5
6.3 Spot Film Device assembly .................................................................. 6-6
6.4 Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly ......................... 6-10
(Rev. 7) i APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
6.5 Machine cable connection .................................................................. 6-12

6.6 Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23
6.6.1 9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation.................................. 6-24
6.6.2 16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model) ............ 6-26
6.6.3 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation....................................... 6-28
6.6.3.1 9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation .................... 6-29
6.6.3.2 12” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation .................. 6-31
6.6.3.3 16” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation .................. 6-33
6.7 Installation of the Tube - Collimator group......................................... 6-35
6.8 Mounting the covers .......................................................................... 6-39
6.9 Tabletop assembly ............................................................................. 6-45
6.9.1 Curved tabletop assembly .............................................................. 6-45
6.9.2 Flat tabletop assembly ................................................................... 6-47
6.10 Final verifications .............................................................................. 6-49
7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE 7-1

7.1 Functioning sequences ........................................................................ 7-3
7.1.1 Powering up and initialisation sequence ........................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Activation sequence for a movement ................................................. 7-4
7.2 Fault Conditions .................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Generation of a condition alarm ....................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Generation of a operating alarm ....................................................... 7-6
7.2.3 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit.......................... 7-7
8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION 8-1

8.1 Output signals from the Apollo table.................................................... 8-1
8.2 Input signals towards the Apollo table ................................................. 8-3
9 CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF

THE DATA GROUPS 9-1
10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA 10-1

10.1 Potmeter adjustment.......................................................................... 10-4
10.1.1 Cell data and list............................................................................ 10-5
10.1.2 ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102) ...................... 10-9
10.1.3 SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)................................. 10-10
10.1.4 MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment
(cells 105 ÷ 108)........................................................................... 10-11
10.1.5 SENSING TRAY WIDTH CASSETTE potmeter adjustment
(cells 109 − 110) (Wall Bucky option) ............................................ 10-15
10.1.6 SENSING TRAY HEIGHT CASSETTE potmeter adjustment
(cells 111 − 112) (Wall Bucky option) ............................................ 10-16
APOLLO ii (Rev. 7)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
10.1.7 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment

(cells 113 – 114) ........................................................................... 10-17
10.1.7.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1") ......... 10-17
10.1.7.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") ......... 10-18
10.1.8 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 115 – 116). 10-19
10.1.9 WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118)......... 10-20
10.1.10 HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 – 120) ...... 10-21
10.1.11 IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment
(cells 121 – 122) ........................................................................... 10-22
10.1.12 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 – 124)...... 10-23
10.1.13 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126) ................................. 10-24
10.1.14 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128) ............. 10-25
10.1.14.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment ............... 10-26
10.1.15 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130) ........ 10-28
10.1.16 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132) .......................... 10-29
10.1.17 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133) ................... 10-30
11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS

(EXCEPT GROUP 100) 11-1
11.1 Group 200 – Installation data ............................................................ 11-3
11.1.1 Function of the parameters of group 200 ........................................ 11-3
11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data............................................ 11-17
11.2.1 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control .......................... 11-17
11.2.2 Motors check data function .......................................................... 11-21
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs .............................. 11-24
11.3.1 Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback .. 11-24
11.3.2 Equipment mechanical dimensions .............................................. 11-28
11.3.3 Data relative to single fault potmeter controls ............................... 11-31
11.3.4 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run .................................. 11-35
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run ..................................... 11-36
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run .................................... 11-41
11.3.5 Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements ................................ 11-43
11.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy ............................................................ 11-45
11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory .................... 11-46
11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life .......................... 11-47
11.6.1 Spot Film Device test.................................................................... 11-48
11.6.2 Table test ..................................................................................... 11-50
11.7 Position 731 – Remote service function ............................................ 11-52
11.8 Position 751 – Alarms memory......................................................... 11-53
11.9 Position 850 – Table cycles memory ................................................. 11-61
12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC 12-1
(Rev. 7) iii APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
13 FUNCTIONALITY 13-1
13.1 Collision............................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.1 Anticollision barrier ....................................................................... 13-5
13.1.2 Anti entrapment device .................................................................. 13-6
13.2 Compressor ....................................................................................... 13-7
13.3 Collimator.......................................................................................... 13-8
13.4 Table automatic positioning ............................................................. 13-11
13.5 Automatic collimation on Wall Bucky with Sensing tray (Option) ..... 13-12
14 OPERATING MODE 14-1

14.1 Spot Film Device ................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.1 "Standard radiography" performance block diagram........................ 14-2
14.1.2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram ..................................................... 14-3
14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4
14.2.1 "Standard tomography" block diagram............................................ 14-5
14.2.2 "Sequential tomography" block diagram.......................................... 14-6
14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7
14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8
14.4.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram................................................ 14-9
14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10
14.5.1 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-11
14.5.2 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-12
14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13
14.6.1 "Stepping angio" block diagram .................................................... 14-14
15 EMERGENCY END RUN 15-1
16 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT 16-1

16.1 A3 output PCB................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Collimator axle speed adjustment ................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) ......... 16-3
16.2 Compressor PCB................................................................................ 16-4
16.3 SID speed set (for versions with SID DFF 1100 ÷ 1800 mm /
43.3" ÷ 70.9" only).............................................................................. 16-6
17 THREE-PHASE INVERTER 17-1

17.1 Inverter input/output functions......................................................... 17-2
17.2 Inverter hardware setting................................................................... 17-3
APOLLO iv (Rev. 7)
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
17.3 Inverter software parameters setting.................................................. 17-3

17.3.1 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali ................. 17-4
17.3.2 Parameters that maintain the default settings................................. 17-6
17.4 Access to parameters for writing ........................................................ 17-7
17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters .................................. 17-8
18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS 18-1
19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS 19-1

19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment ............................................................. 19-1
19.1.1 Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette ...................... 19-2
19.1.2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette........................ 19-3
19.1.3 Checking the positioning of the shutters ......................................... 19-3
19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field.............................. 19-4
19.2.1 Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm ................. 19-4
19.3 Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam .......................................... 19-6
19.4 Collimator adjustment ....................................................................... 19-8
19.4.1 Collimation on SFD ........................................................................ 19-8
19.4.2 External SFD collimation (for C-CSA-US version only) ..................... 19-9
20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 20-1

20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses............................................ 20-3
20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by
the processor ................................................................................... 20-40
20.2.1 Table ........................................................................................... 20-40
20.2.2 Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version) ................. 20-42
20.2.3 Collimator .................................................................................... 20-45
21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING 21-1

21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out ............................................ 21-2
21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician ... 21-3
22 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS 22-1

22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings................................................. 22-2
23 SPARE PARTS 23-1
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or

translated without the prior written consent of Villa Sistemi Medicali.
This manual is the English translation of the Italian original manual version.
(Rev. 8) v APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
APOLLO vi (Rev. 7)
SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with
which it is sold, to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and
repair operations, commonly carried out by the service engineer, are
being performed.
The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not
affect how it works.
The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to

perform general X-ray examinations. In particular, because of its
connected accessories, the equipment is an optimal solution for
examinations where the use of contrast liquids is required.
The present manual provides the user with instructions for a safe and
efficient use of the equipment.
The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures

contained in the manual and shall never be used for other purposes than
those provided by the manual itself.
Apollo is an electromedical equipment and, as such, it can be used

solely under the supervision of a physician or of highly qualified
personnel with the necessary competence in matter of protection from
X-rays.
The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements

regulating the installation and the functioning of the equipment itself.
1.1 Symbols used in this manual
Indicates a “NOTE”; please pay particular attention when reading the

topics identified by such symbol.
Indicates a “WARNING”; topics identified by this symbol refer to the

patient and/or operator safety aspects.
(Rev. 3) 1-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Introduction
1.2 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical

service
For any technical queries please contact the following:

• Telephone number +39 02 488591
• Fax number +39 02 48859222
• E-mail: service_support@villasm.com
APOLLO 1-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2 SAFETY ASPECTS
WARNING:
All information contained in the present chapter must be carefully read
and, where provided, must be applied in order to avoid damage to the
equipment or to people.
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in

compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information for an appropriate use and warnings about the dangers
associated with X-ray generators.
Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for:

• the use of Apollo equipment different from the one it was originally
designed for
• damages to the equipment, to the operator, to the patient caused by
both wrong installation and maintenance not in conformity with the
procedures contained in the equipment's user and maintenance
manuals, and by incorrect operating techniques
• mechanical and/or electrical modifications performed during or after
installation.
Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide

technical assistance for the equipment.
Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the

electrical cabinet and of the equipment, and access the parts under
tension and the moving parts.
(Rev. 3) 2-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.1 Warnings
Apollo is suited for use in hospital, therefore the line connection may not
be carried out in buildings with domestic-type power supply lines.
The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours,

anaesthetic mixtures inflammable when in contact with air, oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion, avoid the

infiltration of water of other liquids in the equipment.
Before cleaning the equipment, always ensure it is disconnected from the

line.
All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic

microprocessor system. Speeds, positions, starts and stops of these
movements are controlled and managed by the equipment's logic. Safety
aspects are fundamental in this logic in order to ensure the maximum
safety both for the patient and the operator. Nevertheless, the operator
MUST ALWAYS PAY CLOSE ATTENTION when a movement is activated.
Press the EMERGENCY red buttons located on the control console and
on the front side of the equipment in case of danger. These buttons will
immediately stop any movement and function. They are a valid
instrument for the operator in addition to the intrinsic safety devices of
the equipment.
Before activating motorised parts, such as the tilting, the tabletop,

or the angulation, ensure that the patient is correctly positioned
and that their legs and arms are positioned within the shape of the
tabletop. If possible, use the support handgrips. During the motorised
movements, no objects interfering with the movements should be in
proximity of the table.
Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.
Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from

electromagnetic interference, the equipment must be installed at a
certain distance from the electrical energy transformation cabins, from
static uninterruptible power supplies, from walkie-talkies and cellular
phones. The latter two may only be used at the distances from any
element of the equipment reported in the following page.
APOLLO 2-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
R.F. source power Distance (m)

10 mW 0.3
100 mW 1
1W 3
10 W 8
100 W 30
Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in

compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations. Non-
compliant instruments, with known scarce immunity to electromagnetic
fields, must be installed at a distance of at least 3 mt (9.84 feet) from
Apollo and must be powered through a dedicated electric line.
Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment:
Electromagnetic
Conformity EMC usage environment
emissions
Irradiated and A class Apollo can be connected to a power
conducted emissions supply line different from the domestic
line.
CISPR 11 Group I Apollo generates Radio Frequency
energy only for internal functioning. The
generated R.F. level does not cause
interference with the electrical devices
used nearby.
Emitted harmonic Complying Apollo can be connected to a power
EN 61000-3-2 supply line different from the domestic
line.
Flicker EN 61000-3-3 Complying Apollo can be connected to a power
tension/emission supply line different from the domestic
fluctuations line.
EN 60601-1-2 immunity Complying Apollo can be connected to a power
(EN 61000-4-2 /3 /4 /5 supply line different from the domestic
/6 /8 /11) line.
In case of line voltage dips that last longer than what can be sustained by
the table electronic control system, the examination in progress may be
cancelled. As a consequence, the tabletop and scan movements, as well
as the angulation, that may cause damage to the patient become
inhibited. The Spot Film Device will be initialised and, in case the
cassette is loaded, on the display a warning will ask the operator to
remove it before proceeding.
(Rev. 3) 2-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres.
Apollo must be powered off when using the electrosurgery cutter or

similar devices.
Clean and, when necessary, disinfect the parts that may come into
contact with the patient by following the procedures provided in the
chapter 21.
APOLLO 2-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.2 Radioprotection warnings
Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in

compliance with safety requirements; moreover, it provides all necessary
information and warnings about the dangers associated with equipment
connected to X-ray generators.
The personnel authorised to perform X-ray examinations must observe

all regulations regarding the protection against ionizing radiation as
reported below:
• Use dedicated protections (leaded clothing) to protect the patient from
X-rays diffused in the areas adjacent to the one to be X-rayed.
• During X-ray examinations, only the patient is allowed to stay in the
room. Medical and paramedic personnel or specifically authorised
personnel, if required by the examination, may also be present only if
wearing radioprotective clothing. The personnel in the room, during
the examination in progress, must stay in the areas indicated in the
figures below.
6
Occupation area
5 (see Figure 2-2)
Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view
NOTE:
The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm (23.6"x23.6"x78.7")
occupation area as specified by the applied regulations. In reality,
because the I.I. Spot Film Device, tube group has an excursion of
1600 mm (62.9"), the total occupation zone is the one showed in Figure
2-2. Such area takes into account the above-mentioned excursion.
(Rev. 3) 2-5 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
Occupation area
600x2380 mm
(23.6"x93.7")
H = 2000 mm (78.7")
Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view
Occupation area
(see Figure 2-4)
G
F
E
D
C
1400 mm
B (55.1")
Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view
APOLLO 2-6 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
450 mm
(17.7")
Occupation area
600x600 mm (23.6"x23.6")
H = 1700 mm (66.9")
Figure 2-4: Vertical table, plan view
The maximum values of the radiation diffused in the indicated areas are
reported in the following table.
Such values have been detected as reported in the safety regulation
IEC 601-1-3 and, in particular, for technique factors of 120 kV, 3 mA
continuative emission.
Figure Ref. H from the ground Dosage

1 1 350 mm (13.8") 0.06 mGy/h
1 2 600 mm (23.6") 0.09 mGy/h
1 3 1000 mm (39.4") 2.75 mGy/h
1 4 1200 mm (47.2") 10.5 mGy/h
1 5 1400 mm (55.1") 13.9 mGy/h
1 6 1600 mm (63.0") 13.4 mGy/h
1 7 1800 mm (70.9") 9.6 mGy/h
1 8 2000 mm (78.7") 6.2 mGy/h
3 A 350 mm (13.8") 1.1 mGy/h
3 B 600 mm (23.6") 1.9 mGy/h
3 C 1000 mm (39.4") 3.3 mGy/h
3 D 1200 mm (47.2") 4.1 mGy/h
3 E 1400 mm (55.1") 4.4 mGy/h
3 F 1600 mm (63.0") 4.1 mGy/h
3 G 1700 mm (66.9") 3.5 mGy/h
(Rev. 3) 2-7 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.3 Environmental risks and disposal
Some of Apollo components contain material and liquid that, at the end
of the equipment life-cycle, must be disposed of at the recycling centres
appointed by the Local Health Units.
In particular, the equipment contains the following materials and/or
components:
• “Reducers”: lubricating oil, steel, aluminium
• Motor: iron, copper, hard plastic material casings
• Electric cabinet: iron, aluminium, copper, non-biodegradable
plastics, vetronite for printed circuits.
APOLLO 2-8 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
2.4 Used symbols
Symbol Description
Equipment with Type B applied parts
Some components contain material and liquid

that, at the end of the equipment life-cycle, must
be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed
by the Local Health Units
∼ Alternating current
N Neutral conductor connection point
R S T Three-phase line conductors connection point
Ground-fault protection
Warning: consult the accompanying

documentation
Dangerous voltage
(Rev. 3) 2-9 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Safety aspects
APOLLO 2-10 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3 DESCRIPTION
3.1 ID labels
2 1b
(Rev. 3) 3-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.1.1 ID labels "CE" version
1a 1b
Apollo features label Apollo ID label
(located on the electric cabinet) (located on the equipment)
2 3
Spot Film Device Collimator
features label features label
5
"Mechanical moving parts"
label
4
"Total Filtration"
label
6
"Connect TV chain only" label
(inside the electric cabinet)
7
Compression coupling ID
label
APOLLO 3-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.1.2 ID labels "CE" plus "C-

"C-CSA-
CSA-US" version
1a 1b
Apollo features label Apollo ID label
(located on the electric cabinet) (located on the equipment)
1c
C-CSA-US certification plate
(located on the electric cabinet)
2 3
Spot Film Device Collimator
features label features label
4
"Total Filtration"
label 5
"Mechanical
moving parts"
label
6
"Connect TV
chain only" label
(inside the electric
cabinet)
7
Compression coupling ID
label
(Rev. 3) 3-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
3.2 Description
The remote controlled Apollo table is the latest development of remote

controlled tables produced by Villa Sistemi Medicali.
Apollo table is available in the traditional configuration with a Spot Film

Device or in the "All Digital" version, where the Spot Film Device is not
present and the table necessarily has to be completed by Digital Image
acquisition system.
The most recent features applied to this type of table have been
incorporated and further improved. In particular:
• the mechanical construction
• the cassette's loading/unloading inside the SFD
• the removal of components' numerous supporting frames, so that the
components become "self-supporting".
The fundamental functional concepts of the Apollo table are:

• smallest possible space occupied
• patient coverage simply through the longitudinal movement of the U
arc
• elevating tabletop with parts rotation system as opposed to sliding
system
• modern, concept winning appearance and design
• operator's rear access without barriers towards the patient
• reduced skin-to-film distance or skin-to-I.I. entrance distance in the
"All Digital" version
• carbon fibre or plastic tabletop, with slight curvature or flat surface
and integrated accessories holder profiles
• reduced I.I.-film distance to avoid the parallax correction
• reduced-dimension console with new functional concepts.
Movements and complex functions are controlled by the remote-control

console located in the protected X-ray area.
The main table movements are replicated on the control panel on the side
of the table.
All electric and electronic control and logic elements, except for the
console, are grouped in a single electric cabinet, which also houses the
control modules for the system accessories.
The Apollo table, in its traditional configuration, is equipped with a Spot

Film Device that permits the use of commonly used cassettes of any type.
The format division program is very complete and is described in another
paragraph.
APOLLO 3-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
An automatic collimator, controlled by a central logic, sets the limits for

the irradiated area.
The collimator can be of square-rectangular collimation type or iris type,
which has circular field collimation in addition to square rectangular
collimation. The "All Digital" version is equipped always with an iris type
collimator.
To meet the requirements of fluoroscopic modality and image acquisition

by means of digital systems, the table is setup to accept image
intensifiers from a minimum of 9" (nominal) maximum input field up to a
maximum of 16" (nominal).
The intensifier is fixed by default by docking it to the Spot Film Device or

to an equivalent support in the "All Digital" version, by means of an
upper mount anchor plate. As an option, a device called "elevating I.I." is
available. This allows to raise the input surface of the I.I. closer to the
patient when the cassette is not in the exposure position.
In "All Digital" version, the II is located closer to table top, consequently
I.I. lift is not available in this configuration.
All movement controls are of "dead man" type.
Apollo was designed and built in compliance with European directives

for obtaining the CE mark as specified in the European Directive 93/42
for Medical Devices, guaranteeing the highest safety for both the operator
and the patient.
Apollo is a universal table for radiological diagnosis, built to satisfy all

needs. It can be employed for the examination of the digestive tract, of
the cranium, and of the skeleton, urographies, myelographies, vascular
and lungs examinations, bronchography. When fitted with a digital
acquisition system, it can also be used for angiographies.
The ID code of the equipment varies according to the type of collimator

and to the voltage.
Apollo is available with both standard and optional accessories. The

following table lists all the accessories and divides them as standard, i.e.
those usually coming with the equipment, and optional accessories,
which must be specifically requested when ordering the equipment.
(Rev. 3) 3-5 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Description
Type of
Ref. Description
accessory
A Block patient footrest Standard
B Patient support handgrip (N. 2 pieces) Standard
C Headrest Optional
D Leg support (N. 2 pieces) Optional
E Band-tensioner with compression band Optional
F Lateral cassette holder Optional
B
A
F
E
D
Figure 3-1: Curved Tabletop accessories
A B
F
D
E
Figure 3-2: Flat Tabletop accessories
All accessories are easily applied as they are mounted directly on the
tabletop's profile.
APOLLO 3-6 (Rev. 6)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4 TECHNICAL DATA
4.1 Technical features
General features
Type of equipment Apollo
Manufacturer Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Type of equipment and classification in
class I with Type B applied
compliance with IEC 60601-1 standard
parts
regulation
Grade of protection in compliance with equipment non protected against
IEC 60529 standard regulation penetration of liquids
Operating mode continuous functioning
Use equipment not suitable for use in
presence of inflammable
anaesthetic mixtures
Electric features
Available voltage 3N~ 380-400 Vac ±10%
3N~ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Frequency 50-60 Hz
Maximum current 7 A @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
6 A @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Fuses on safety isolating transformer 8 AT @ 380-400 Vac
7 AT @ 415-480 Vac
Equipment protection 8 A with magnetothermic
Power 6 kVA
Line impedance < 1.0 Ω @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
< 1.0 Ω @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
Load voltage drop < 2 % @ 380-400 Vac ±10%
< 2 % @ 415-480 Vac ±10%
(Rev. 3) 4-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Mechanical features
Weight 895 Kg (1973 lbs) – SFD version
830 kg (1830 lbs) – All Digital
Height vertical table 2500 mm (98.4")
Height horizontal table and max SID 3180 mm (125.2") - SID 1500 mm (59.1")
3480 mm (137.0") - SID 1800 mm (70.9")
Width from the front end of the Spot 1590 mm (62.6")
Film Device to the rear end of the main
beam
Total width completely retracted 1920 mm (75.6")
Length (horizontal table) 2420 mm (95.3")
Total length with +90 /-90 max SID 4960 mm (195.3") - SID 1500 mm (59.1")
5560 mm (218.9") - SID 1800 mm (70.9")
Setup for I.I. standard fixed mount
optional lift
I.I. max size 16 inch
Minimum curved tabletop height from CENTRE EDGE
the ground (with Spot Film Device) minimum 600 mm 668 mm
(23.6") (26.3")
with 9" I.I. 600 mm 668 mm
(23.6") (26.3")
with 12" I.I. 695 mm 763 mm
(27.4") (30.0")
with 16" I.I. 775 mm 843 mm
(35.0") (33.2")
Minimum flat tabletop height from the minimum 618 mm (24.3")
ground (with Spot Film Device) with 9" I.I. 618 mm (24.3")
with 12" I.I. 713 mm (28.1")
with 16" I.I. 793 mm (31.2")
Minimum curved tabletop height from CENTRE EDGE
the ground (All Digital version) minimum 600 mm 668 mm
(23.6") (26.3")
with 9" I.I. 600 mm 668 mm
(23.6") (26.3")
with 12" I.I. 637 mm 705 mm
(25.1") (27.7")
with 16" I.I. 717 mm 785 mm
(28.2") (30.9")
Minimum flat tabletop height from the minimum 618 mm (24.3")
ground (All Digital version) with 9" I.I. 618 mm (24.3")
with 12" I.I. 655 mm (25.8")
with 16" I.I. 735 mm (28.9")
Distance tabletop centre – upper side 185 mm (7.3") – curved tabletop
beam 203 mm (7.9") – flat tabletop
Distance upper tabletop edge – 117 mm (4.6")
upper side beam
APOLLO 4-2 (Rev. 7)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Mechanical features
Distance rear side beam – 765 mm (30.1")
internal tabletop edge (with centered tabletop)
Distance rear side beam – 605 mm (23.8")
internal tabletop edge (with internal tabletop
end run)
Electric cabinet containing all electric and 520 x 550 x 1950 mm
electronics controls, including the TV-chain (20.4" x 21.6" x 76.8")
control or the digital module
Max patient weight with all movements 284 kg (626.1 lbs)
Runs
Tilting + 90° / - 90°
Lift 800 mm (31.5")
Longitudinal tabletop fixed
Transversal tabletop 320 mm (12.6")
Scan 1600 mm (62.9")
Source-to-film distance 1000 - 1500 mm (39.4" - 59.1")
1100 - 1800 mm (43.3" - 70.9")
Angulation + 40° / - 40°
Compressor (cone run in X-ray field) 250 mm (9.8")
Tube rotation + 180° / - 90°
I.I. lift 38 mm (1.5")
Speed
Tilting slow 4.5 °/sec
fast 6.5 °/sec (adjustable)
Lift 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable)
Transversal tabletop 50 mm/sec (2"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
Scan from 30 mm/sec (1.2"/sec) to
200 mm/sec (7.9"/sec) (adjustable)
with speeding step for small or
wide movements
Source-to-film distance for version with max 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
SID 1500 mm (59.1")
Source-to-film distance for version with max is possible to set two fixed value:
SID 1800 mm (70.9") - 32 mm/sec (1.3"/sec) ± 10%
- 41 mm/sec (1.6"/sec) ± 10%
Angulation 11.2 °/sec (adjustable)
Compressor 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable)
I.I. lift (optional) 40 mm/sec (1.6"/sec) ± 20% (fixed)
(Rev. 7) 4-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Features data and measures

Distance X-ray field centre / 390 mm (15.4")
table head extremity
Distance X-ray field centre / 390 mm (15.4")
table feet extremity
Skin-to-film distance 65 mm (2.6") for curved tabletop
83 mm (3.3") for flat tabletop
Film-to-fixed I.I. distance 19 mm (0.7") (without parallax correct.)
Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I. 84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop
(SFD versions) 102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with fixed I.I. 26 mm (1.0") for curved tabletop
(All Digital versions) 44 mm (1.7") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift 84 mm (3.3") for curved tabletop
completely lowered 102 mm (4.0") for flat tabletop
Skin-to-I.I. distance with I.I. lift choice of 45-65 mm (1.7"-2.5") for
completely lifted curved tabletop
choice of 63-83 mm (2.5"-3.3") for flat
tabletop
Minimum distance compressor cone – 138 mm (5.4") for curved tabletop
tabletop 133 mm (5.2") for flat tabletop
Max distance compressor cone – 388 mm (15.3") for curved tabletop
tabletop 383 mm (15.1") for flat tabletop
Compression force from 3 kg (6.6 lbs) to 15 kg (33.1 lbs)
with 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) step
Tabletop
Size 2379 x 750 mm (93.7" x 29.5") for
curved tabletop
2356 x 738 mm (92.7" x 29.0") for flat
tabletop
Radio-transparent area size 2214 x 650 mm (87.2" x 25.6") for
curved tabletop
2214 x 554 mm (87.2" x 21.8") for flat
tabletop
Standard material policarbonate
Optional material carbon fibre with Rohacell filler
(for curved tabletop only)
Filtration for standard model < 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV
2.7 mm Al
Filtration for carbon fibre model < 0.3 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV
(for curved tabletop only) 2.7 mm Al
Accessories holder guides integrated
Surface smooth with curvature
smooth flat
APOLLO 4-4 (Rev. 4)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Accessories for curved tabletop

Footrest (standard) support surface 400 x 600 mm
(15.7" x 23.6") ca
Handgrips (standard) ergonomic
Headrest and shoulder rest (optional) with cushions and shaped shoulder
stoppers integrated
Compression band (optional) with winder
Legs support (optional) adjustable
Lateral cassette holder (optional) adjustable for lateral projections
Accessories for flat tabletop
Footrest (standard) support surface 300 x 550 mm
(11.8" x 21.6") ca
Handgrips (standard) ergonomic
Headrest and shoulder rest (optional) with shoulder stoppers
Compression band (optional) with winder
Legs support (optional) adjustable
Lateral cassette holder (optional) adjustable for lateral projections
Spot Film Device (NOT present on All Digital version)
Accepted cassette sizes from 13x18 (5"x7") to 35x43 (14"x17")
Divisions on a line from 1 to 4
Crossed divisions in 4 and in 6
Spot Film Device movement with feed belts without tray
Operating mode standard program and rapid sequence
Minimum fluoro-to-exposure switching 0.8 sec
time
Maximum fluoro-to-exposure switching ≤ 1.2 sec
time
Average speed in rapid sequence 2 im/sec
Leaded shutters integrated
Grid vibrating, parkable
Head I.I. fixing pre-set
AEC pre-set
(Rev. 7) 4-5 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Collimator
2 axis collimator rectangular and square
3 axis collimator rectangular, square and iris
Additional filtration (optional) for both with additional filters movement
models (2 mm Al / 1 Al + 0.1 mm Cu / 1 Al + 0.2
mm Cu) manual or motorized
Limitation – automatic
– manual: by means of joystick on
console and buttons on collimator
Operating mode – automatic with / without Hold mode
– manual
Light for centering with timed 100W lamp (min 160 lux @ 1
m) or with on-demand switching off
Minimum dimension X-ray field @ 1m < 1 cm2 (0.39 inch2)
X-ray field coverage @ 1 m > 43 cm2 (17 inch2)
Stray radiation ≤ 45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W
Total filtration rectangular collimator 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al
Total filtration iris collimator 1.0 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7 mm Al
Tomography
Type semiarc / plane with electronic algorithm
Layer max height 350 mm (13.8")
Layer increment with 1 mm (0.04") step
Layer automatic increment selectable with automatic increment
depending on the tomo angle
Speed 11.2 – 22.4 °/sec (adjustable)
Angles 7° - 20° - 30° - 45°
Tomography exposure times (sec) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Grades
speed speed speed speed
7° 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
20° 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.9
30° 2.6 2.0 1.6 1.3
45° 4.0 3.0 2.4 2.0
Direction from right to left or vice versa (adjustable)
Sequential tomography sequential program with forward and back
exposures until divisions are completed
with continuous layer automatic increment
and return to the vertical position at the
end of each exposure without stops
Scan movement range tomography is allowed for variable scan
positions depending on the selected angle
and layer
APOLLO 4-6 (Rev. 4)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
Stepping angio (optional)

Modality only with digital acquisition system
Automatic – step length: depending on the
selected I.I.
– manual: adjustable with 1 mm step
Direction selectable
Interface integrated with digital generator and
scan
Controls
Console movements controls with joystick on table side with
buttons
Console functions controls
User interface with graphic display, function keys and
LED signalling
Controls type "Dead man"
Safety on movements single fault on the HW chain driving
movement and feedback
Environmental conditions
Operating conditions Temperature: from +10 to +40°
Humidity: from 30 to 75 %
Pressure: from 700 to 1060 hPa
Conditions for transport and storage Temperature: from -20 to +70°
Humidity: ≤ 95% non condensing
Pressure: > 630 hPa
(Rev. 3) 4-7 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.2 Formats division table in centimeters
13x18 18x13
18x24 9x24 9x12 24x18 12x18
24x24 12x24 12x12
24x30 12x30 30x24 15x24 15x12 10x24 10x12
30x30 15x30 10x30
18x43 43x18 21x18 14x18
15x40 40x15 20x15 13x15 10x15
20x40 10x40 40x20 20x20 13x20 10x20
30x35 15x35 10x35 35x30 17x30 12x30
30x40 15x40 10x40 40x30 20x30 13x30 10x30
35x35 17x35 12x35
35x43 17x43 12x43 43x35 21x35 14x35 11x35
NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.
APOLLO 4-8 (Rev. 4)

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.3 Formats division table in inches
5x7 7x5
8x10 4x10 4x5 10x8 5x8
10x12 5x12 12x10 6x10 6x5 4x10 4x5
9.5x9.5 4.7x9.5 3x9.5
7x17 17x7 8.5x7 5.7x7 4.3x7
11x14 5.5x14 3.7x14 14x11 7x11 4.7x11 3.5x11
14x14 7x14 4.7x14
14x17 7x17 4.7x17 17x14 8.5x14 5.7x14
NOTE:
The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction
(patient right-to-left). The measure indicated on the various divisions is
nominal.
(Rev. 3) 4-9 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.4 Standards and regulations
Apollo was designed and built in compliance with the following

regulations:
IEC/EN 60601-1
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 1:
collateral standard: safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems
IEC/EN 60601-1-2
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 2:
collateral standard: electromagnetic compatibility – requirements and
test
IEC/EN 60601-1-3
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety -
collateral standard: general requirements for radiation protection in
diagnostic X-ray equipment
IEC/EN 60601-2-32 (with exclusion of clause 22.4.5)

Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 2: Particular requirements for the
safety of associated equipment of X-ray equipment.
0051 The EC symbol certifies the conformity of Apollo to

Directive 93/42/EEC.
Versions C-CSA-US, knowable by the identification code with last digit

"1" (ex 9784xxxxx1), are produced in compliance, more than above listed
standards, also with as indicated below:
CFR 21
Code Federal Regulation. Sub Chapter J
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 60601-1-M90

Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for
safety
UL Std No 60601-1 (2nd edition)

Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General requirements for
safety.

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.5 Dimensions
4.5.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1")
A: with IB 9” min. 600mm (23.6") – max 1400mm (55.1")

with IB 12” min. 695mm (27.4") – max 1400mm (55.1")
B: with IB 9” min. 1880mm (74.8") – max 2680mm (105.5")
Figure 4-1
(Rev. 7) 4-11 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Technical data
4.5.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")
A: with IB 9” min. 600mm (23.6") – max 1400mm (55.1")

B: with IB 9” min. 2075mm (81.7") – max 2780mm (109.4")
Figure 4-2

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5 PRE-
PRE-INSTALLATION
The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation
performed will ensure the remote-controlled Apollo table will work
properly.
The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance
necessary right from the pre-installation stage (if requested, to check the
positioning of the equipment inside the X-ray room).
The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo table
according to the choice of the most suitable floor plate (Figure 5-1, Figure
5-2 or Figure 5-3) that will be selected considering that the maximum
weight of the equipment (weight of machine fitted with 16" IB and a
patient of 284kg / 626.1lbs) is about 2400kg (5280lbs).
Verify that the floor is able to support this weight on the fixing plate area.
According with the selected floor plate, position it as described below:
Standard floor fixing plate
Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate (code 5584902000)
Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 420x1310 mm

(16.5"x51.6") until you reach the concrete of the slab, so that the top
surface of the plate is flush with the floor.
The concrete surface of the slab, under the plate, must be rough
enough to ensure the concrete to be poured adheres properly.
Position the plate and carefully level it so that the surface obtained is
as level as possible. The plate already has threaded holes and M16
bolts for the anchorage of the base; these holes must be protected
(e.g. by inserting the fixing bolts) so that they are not blocked up
during installation; pour the concrete with a cement/sand ratio of
1:2.5, remove the surplus and let it dry for six hours.
(Rev. 6) 5-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Floor top plate
Figure 5-2: Floor top plate (code 5584902600)
In case is not possibile to remove the surface of the floor inside the
radiological room, is available and must be requested at the time of
the order, a floor top plate.
Position the floor top plate and fix it to the floor taking advantage of
the relative fixing holes, using metallic dowels (supplied) or chemical
dowels (not supplied), depending on the floor characteristics.
NOTE:
The floor top plate is not symmetrical, so it’s important to position it in
the correct way.
APOLLO 5-2 (Rev. 6)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Weight distribution plate
Figure 5-3: Weight distribution plate (code 5584902500)
If the bearing capacity of the slab is not sufficient, a weight

distribution plate is available and must be requested at the time of
the order.
This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways:

1. Sunk into the floor
2. Fixed to the floor.
In the first case (1) follow the instructions given above for a plate of a
smaller size and be sure to remove the upper surface of the floor over
an area of 2700x1600 mm (106.3"x63").
In the second case (2), the plate must be fixed to the floor taking
advantage of the relative fixing holes and masked through the
construction of raised section that covers the structure of the plate
itself.
NOTE:
The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical, so it’s important to
position it in the correct way.
(Rev. 6) 5-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.1 Space requirements
NOTE:
In order to unload the main body of the device from the truck, it is
necessary either that the truck has an elevating lift or to use an elevating
fork cart.
When performing the overview of the location (installation room, aisles,

doors ecc.) please remind that the main body of the device after having
removed the wood box has dimensions given in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4
The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than

2550 mm (100.4"); operating room on the front is advised to be 1000 mm
(39.4"); on the sides leave room as detailed in Figure 5-6.
APOLLO 5-4 (Rev. 7)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Under floor conducts (Figure 5-5) must meet the following requirements:
• C: suggested section: 20x10 cm (7.9"x3.9") / max distance between
the pit and the cabinet: 9 m (29.53 feet).
• D: suggested section: 10 cm (3.9") / max distance between the
cabinet and the control panel 14 m (45.93 feet).
NOTE:
If distances are larger than those indicated above (C and D) ask adequate
length of connecting cables at order.
WARNING:
The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be
more easily accessed during installation and maintenance.
(*) The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting
area) = 800 mm (31.5")
The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting
area) = 600 mm (23.6")
Figure 5-5a: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo with

SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1") installation without any limit on
table movements
(Rev. 7) 5-5 APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
(*) The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting area)
= 800 mm (31.5")
The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting area)
= 600 mm (23.6")
Figure 5-5b: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo with

SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") installation without any limit on
table movements
APOLLO 5-6 (Rev. 7)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
Figure 5-6: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation

with Chest Stand without any limit on table movements
NOTE:
The installation example as per Figure 5-6 is not represented for version
with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9").
The reason is because this version is prepared for exams normally done
on Chest Stand.
(Rev. 7) 5-7 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.2 Electrical provisions
• POWER SUPPLY 380-400Vac 3 phase +Ground

415-480Vac 3 phase +Ground
• FREQUENCY 50-60Hz
• ABSORBED POWER (table only) 5kVA
• ABSORBED CURRENT (table only) 7A
• APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE < 1Ω
NOTE:
Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray
room including the Apollo table equals 25-30kVA.
WARNING:
The equipment can be connected directly to the mains or in cascade with
the ray generator, a preferable alternative because, when the generator is
powered down, the table and the accessories connected to it (e.g. the
image capturing system or chest stand) are turned off as well. In both
cases the wires of the three-phase power supply must have a cross-
section of at least 4.0 mm².
• Connection directly to the mains:
Make provision for an automatic switch with fuse as per the current
regulations in the country of installation.
• Connection to the generator:
Check the generator manual to make sure that the connection points
are right for the load and insulation values.
The general grounding must respond to the standards in force. If the
grounding of the equipment is not good enough, it might jeopardise the
safety of the operator and/or cause the malfunctioning of the electronic
equipment.
APOLLO 5-8 (Rev. 7)

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation
5.3 Adaptation to the mains voltage
The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo table is
fitted with two sets of (R S T) primary winding power supply terminals.
One group is for connecting the 380V power supply, the other 400V.
The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V or 400V
connection. This pre-disposition must be specified on ordering and will
be incorporated in the factory before shipment.
Before powering up the equipment, make sure that the mains voltage
corresponds with the predisposition of the equipment by checking that:
• the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating
plate is described in paragraph 3.1)
• the primary main power supply insulation transformer T1 connection
corresponds with the mains voltage.
5.4 Environmental conditions
The data in paragraph 4.1 must be complied with for the environmental
operating and transport/storage conditions.
(Rev. 7) 5-9 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Pre-installation

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6 INSTALLATION
WARNING:
During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical
connection described below, the safety regulations in force must be
respected and the precautions described below must be taken:
• wear accident prevention clothing (boots, gloves, goggles when
necessary)
• always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out
procedures that put you or others at risk
• make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the
installation is completed or said electricity is required for installation
purposes.
• when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is
in the final phases of completion, make sure the power supply is cut
off by means of a switch before accessing any of the parts that can be
a danger.
NOTE:
The instructions present on this chapter are referred to a standard unit
versions (with Spot Film Device).
For "All Digital" versions, all instructions relevant to SFD must be
intended to the I.I. support frame assy. This I.I. support frame has
mechanical characteristics equal to the SFD one, but any devices for
cassettes, grid and shutters are not present.
For delivery, handling and assembly purposes, the machine is broken

down into units that must be put together:
Base with beam and column (Assembly 1)

Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2)
Spot Film Device (Asse
(Assembly
mbly 3)
Left-
Left- and right-
right-hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4)
Tabletop (Assembly 5)
Assemble the units by following the instructions below.
(Rev. 3) 6-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.1 Base positioning with beam and column
The base assembly with beam and column are shipped in a crate as
shown in Figure 6-1.
WARNING:
Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate, check that this
is flat with respect to both axes.
Do not use the grubs positioned on the left side of the basement to
achieve horizontal alignment of the table; these grubs may be used in the
final stages of installation to correct possible elastic deformations of the
basement when the table is loaded (see paragraph 6.5).
NOTE:
The operations described below require the use of a transpallet.
1. Remove lid "A" and walls "B" of the crate.

2. Remove the wooden beams "C" holding the pallets together, from the
pallet.
3. Remove bolts "D" and "E" holding the base assembly to the pallets.
B
B
D C
E
D
B C
B
Figure 6-1
APOLLO 6-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Position the transpallet under one of the 2 side pallets "D", raise the
base assembly and remove the central pallet "E". Lower the
transpallet.
5. Referring to Figure 6-2, insert the transpallet centrally under the
base assembly and lift it to free the two side pallets "D". Rest one side
of the base on two supports (e.g. the pallets positioned on the corner)
leaving the centre part free; suspend the other side, inserting one of
the two main beams "C" parallel to the transpallet fork, allowing the
side of the base to protrude as much as possible.
Main beam
“C”
Figure 6-2
6. Referring to Figure 6-3, remove the transpallet and position it on the
side of the base assembly. Exert leverage on the shoulder and lift the
base assembly enough to remove the central pallet "C" and reposition
it under the base, in such a way that it is parallel to the long side of
the base and subsequently allows the transpallet to be inserted to lift
the group. Lower the transpallet.
Main beam
“C”
Figure 6-3
(Rev. 3) 6-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
7. Leaving the transpallet in its present position, slide it under the base
in such a way that it is possible to lift the assembly and free the two
supports. With the greatest of care, suspend the base assembly on
the central main beam "C"; slide the transpallet in completely under
the base.
8. Bring the base assembly into the room and follow the above
procedure in reverse, positioning the transpallet perpendicularly to
the base assembly. Take the base assembly to the fixing plate and try
to align the base-plate fixing holes as well as possible.
9. Position the two main wood beams "C" at the side of the base, parallel
to the transpallet forks. Lower the base assembly and remove the
transpallet.
10. Exerting leverage on one of the two side iron brackets, raise the base
assembly enough to remove one of the wooden beams. Gently lower
the base assembly until it is resting on the ground. Repeat the
operation to remove the remaining wooden beam.
11. Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with
those in the anchorage plate. If it is necessary, to move the base
assembly to align the fixing holes, use the transpallet.
NOTE:
Moving the base while it is resting on the ground by applying
leverage to the structure is not advised under any circumstances.
This operation could damage the actuators.
12. Close the two fixing holes on head side, 2 grubs are present to adjust
the base position in order to avoid interferences during
trendelenbourg movement, between middle beam and plastic guides
present on the base. Unlock the 2 grubs and fix the base on the floor
plate. The grubs adjustment is explained on paragraph 6.5 , items
from 10 to 15. At this moment only it is allowed to remove the
transport wood frame and lateral iron plate for main beam.
APOLLO 6-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.2 Assembly of the Tube support arm
1. Remove the front plate from the column stand.

2. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and, at the
same time, position the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing
holes on the parts to assemble (front plate – tube support arm -
column section) are aligned (Figure 6-4).
3. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the
column before tightening the fixing screws.
4. Position on the frontal part of the X-ray tube arm the microswitch for
0° position setting it in such a way that it is not activated when the
X-ray tube rotation pin reaches position 0°.
In case the equipmet will be supplied including the "Sensing device"
kit (together with a Chest Stand with the "Sensing" cassette holder –
kit code 7284829000), will be present a second microswitch used to
read the 180° position.
Column
section
Tube
support arm
Front
plate
Micro 0°
Figure 6-4
(Rev. 6) 6-5 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.3 Spot Film Device assembly

assembly
WARNING:
A plate is provided with the Spot Film Device. This must be assembled
with the four Spot Film Device support wheels and it will constitute a tool
necessary for the installation of the Image Intensifier (paragraph 6.6).
The Spot Film Device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and
fitted with wheels to make it easier to move and position.
1. Position the Spot Film Device assembly mounted on the transport
pallet, near the machine.
2. Free the four Spot Film Device supports from the safety blocks fixing
them to the transport pallet.
3. Remove the Spot Film Device from the pallet being careful to pay the
utmost attention not to damage it.
4. Remove all screws fixing the Spot Film Device, the two safety rods
holding the inclination motor support on the end wall and remove the
protection of the inclination potmeter (Figure 6-5). Remove the two
top hooks from the Spot Film Device (one per side) (Figure 6-6) so
that positioning can be carried out.
Safety
rod
Protection of the
inclination potmeter
Safety
rod
Figure 6-5
APOLLO 6-6 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
5. Position the Spot Film Device assembly near the end wall and make
sure that it is possible to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and
on the inclination motor support. If it is necessary to lift or lower the
Spot Film Device to align the fastening holes, use the adjustable
supports while being careful to avoid forcing the Spot Film Device on
the angulation motor's fusion attachment (Figure 6-6).
6. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has
been checked, it is possible to fix, without tightening, the Spot Film
Device assembly with the twenty-two bolts supplied (eleven bolts per
side).
If the Spot Film Device is imagined as a plane, it must be at right
angles to the end wall where it is fixed. Check that the two elements
are at right angles to each other using a bubble level. If it is
necessary to make an adjustment to obtain perfect right angles
between the Spot Film Device and the end wall, adjust the adjustable
supports of the Spot Film Device support until the position required
is reached (Figure 6-6).
7. Insert the two centering pins into their holes (Figure 6-6), one on
each side, taking care that the threaded part can be accessed from
outside, and then tighten the twenty-two fastening screws. Remount
the two top hooks removed at point "4" above.
Centering
pin
90°
Top hook
Figure 6-6
8. Remove the four Spot Film Device assembly adjustable supports.
(Rev. 3) 6-7 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
9. Carry out the Spot Film Device wiring pre-arranged on the right-hand
side of the end wall.
The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found
on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device. The wires must be
routed in such a way that they are parallel to and not on top of each
other (Figure 6-7).
The X16 wire, fixed to an anchoring plate, must be placed on the
right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device, interfacing with the flat cable
(X16) installed in the factory.
The following table is an aid in the identification of the cables and
where they must be connected (see also Figure 6-7).
Connector/Cable Point of connection
X101 Spot Film Device PCB A10

X16 Interface connector X16
Ground cable Nr 8 A10 PCB fixing plate
A.E.C. chamber cable A.E.C. chamber cable
X68
X14
X19 X44
X101 X16 Cable clip
Ground cable
Figure 6-7
APOLLO 6-8 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
NOTE:
The automatic exposimeter device is an optional and consequently the
A.E.C. chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter
chamber is fitted to the Spot Film Device.
10. Position the front panel of the Spot Film Device and fix it with the
hinge on the left-hand wall.
Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the PCB of the key pad
fitted on the machine A8.
Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the Spot Film Device's left-
hand wall; shut the panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure
6-8).
X16
Figure 6-8
(Rev. 3) 6-9 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.4 Left-
Left- and right-
right-hand tabletop support arm assembly
The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to
the table fixing pin position and the reference lines for fixing the
respective belts. For this reason there are two labels indicating the left-
hand and right-hand arms.
NOTE:
Both the table top support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the
transport. Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled,
the relative belts have been tensioned and before mounting the tabletop
and moving the arms.
Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-9):

1. Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes.
2. Remove the small plate from the beams.
3. Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts.
4. Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of
the belt on the relative pulleys, following the route indicated in the
figure. Check that the phasing reference lines marked above the belts
of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond; otherwise correct the
position of the belt of the arm.
5. Position the arm in such a way as to be able screw up the small plate
removed at point "2" using the three bolts. At this point the belt is
properly tensioned.
Belt aligment
reference
Arm belt
Coordination
belt
Outside support
Small plate Beam side

protection
Figure 6-9

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6. Do up all the six arm blocking bolts.

7. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during
transport.
For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the
right-hand arm.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.5 Machine
Machine cable connection
The machine is partially factory wired, while the rest of the wires are
provided separately; all have to be wired up to the machine as described
below.
NOTE:
The wire chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-10) are made in such as way that
they can be opened to permit the wires to be inserted. Take care to note
when opening the chains the location of the individual covers. As these
are not all the same, they will have to be put back properly when the
chains are closed.
At this stage only the machine wires can be set up so as to permit
powering the table and to make the remaining installation process stage
easier, or the system wires can also be connected (high tension cables,
anode, etc.). How to proceed in this regard is a matter for the installer's
own discretion. When you decide also to connect the system wires it is
advisable to refer to paragraph 6.7 for tube-collimator group installation.
Figure 6-10
1. Fix the "B" chain to the upper locking bracket.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
NOTE:
To easily identify the end to fix to the upper bracket, check as follow: on
the external side of the link the code number is present.
The end must be fixed on upper bracket is with 1 link code
157.150.100.1 and the following with code 158.150.100.1.
The end must be fixed on lower bracket has all links with code
157.150.100.1.
2. To avoid cable-braiding, is suggested to position the cable chain as

showed in Figure 6-10.
House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain "B". Some of
these wires are much shorter than others. The shorter ones should
be connected to the A11 base connector board and the longer ones in
the table's electrical cabinet and that of the generator if you wish also
to connect up the system cables.
3. Before you start, chain "B" should be positioned as in Figure 6-11.
4. It is advisable at this stage not to close the wiring chain but just to
install some covers so as to secure the wires inside them. Connect
wires X20, X46, X75, X77, X88, X96, X97 and X98 to the A11 base
connector board (Figure 6-12), threading them through "C" (Figure
6-11). The base connector board has a dust guard that has to be
removed when connecting the wires and then replaced. Connect
ground cables 5, 7, 8, 9 and 11 (lift I.I. - optional) to the ground bar
(W2) in the base unit (Figure 6-13).
B C
Figure 6-11
5. Connect ground cable 10 between the ground connection W2 on the

machine base unit and the ground rod (W1) in the cabinet.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6. Connect all the output cables in "C" and from chain "B" to the
machine cabinet: X68, X19, X14, X16, X44, X101, X73, E4, X71, E2,
X106 (lift I.I. – optional), X70, E3, X20, X46, X99.5, X99.6, X74, E1,
X99.1, X99.2, X105 and X45 as indicated in the following table (see
also Figure 6-13).
7. Connect the console cable (X8) to the cabinet; connect the foot
control (cable X41) to the console.
8. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T clamps on the insulation
transformer inside the cabinet. Connect the ground cable to the rod
(W1) in the cabinet.
9. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories when it is
decided wire them up during the procedures described above.
NOTE:
To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to
install the collimator (see paragraph 6.7) and connect it by cable X45 or
simulate collimator presence; in this case it is possible for example to use
a male CANNON 37 pin connector with two voltage partitions built by a
resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-18 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7kΩ
between pins X45-16 and X45-32, a resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-
19 e X45-33 and a resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-17 and X45-33.
At this point the machine can be turned on and perform movements. In

this stage the mechanical alignment of the moving beams with respect to
the basement must be checked and possibly corrected. In order to do so
proceed as follows:
10. Move de equipment up/down and tilt it in both directions; if the

middle beam during same movements is in touch with parts of the
basements, proceed as by the following step, otherwise will be not
necessary other adjustments.
11. Release the two screws fixing the basement to the ground on the left
side of the basement, i.e. close to the regulation grubs.
12. Act on the regulation grubs to correct deformations of the side wall of
the basement: the process is of the trial and error type. Usually it is
advisable to screw in the grub on the opposite side where the
interference is present in the up-down movement of the beam.
13. Tight again the screws holding the basement to the ground.
14. Check again the movements following the procedure from step 10.
15. Make a few tilting movements to verify the correct situation and stop
the procedure.
This procedure should be repeated at the end of installation when the

table is loaded with all its accessories (II, X-ray tube, table top, ecc.)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Table side Cabinet side

Location on the Table Location on the Cabinet Description
cable code cable code
Spot Film Device

X34
motor cable
Spot Film Device

X35
motor cable
Spot Film Device

X36
motor cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10 X68 Spot Film Device activation PCB A4
Spot Film Device
X37
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X38
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X39
motor cable
Spot Film Device
Spot Film Device PCB A10 X19 X19 Input PCB A2
potmeter cable
Spot Film Device PCB A10 X14 X14 Input PCB A2 Spot Film Device cable
Button pad PCB A8 X16 X16 Input PCB A2 Button Pad Cable
Spot Film Device 24Vac

Spot Film Device PCB A10 X44 X44 Cabinet connector PCB A12
power supply
X0.10 Terminal block X0.10

Spot Film Device PCB A10 X101 Emergency stop button cable

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Base unit connector PCB A11 X20 X20 Input PCB A2 Machine potmeter cable
Base unit connector PCB A11 X46 X46 Cabinet connector PCB A12 PCB connection cable X46
X99.5 X0.1 Terminal block X0.1

Angulation connectors PCB A13 SID motor cable

Emergency micro switch
Angulation connector PCB A13 X74
cable
X99.1 X99.1
Angulation connector PCB A13 Compressor PCB A15 Compressor motor cable
X99.2 X99.2
Angulation connector PCB A13 X105 X105 Cabinet connector PCB A12 PCB connection cable
Collimator X45 X45 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Collimator cable

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

X8 Cabinet CPU PCB A1
X22 Input PCB A2

Control panel - CPU PCB A14 X8 Control panel

I.I. lift (optional) Lift motor cable I.I.
Base unit ground rod (W2) 10 10 Cabinet ground rod (W1) Ground cables 10
Power supply cable

Beam motor X70 Inverter box
Main beam motor
Power supply cable
Angulation motor X71 Inverter box
Angulation motor
Power supply cable
Middle beam motor X72 Inverter box
Middle beam motor

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

Power supply cable

Scan motor X73 Inverter box
Scan motor
Base unit ground rod (W2) 10 10 Cabinet ground rod (W1) Ground cables 10
Angulation motor
Angulation motor E2 Terminal block X0.E2
ground cable
Scan moto
Scan motor E4 Terminal block X0.E4
ground cable
Main beam motor
Main beam motor E1 Terminal block X0.E1
ground cable
Middle beam motor
Middle beam motor E3 Terminal block X0.E3
ground cable

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
ANGULATION CONNECTOR CARD - A13

2 4 3 4 3 4 3
1 2 1 2 1 2 1
X89 X90 X85 X86
1 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1
X100 X91 X87 X82
2 2 2 2
X97
1 1 1 1
1
X80 X79 X76 X74
X105
V3 V4
2 2
1 1
X94 X95
1 8 X98
X99
BASE UNIT CONNECTOR CARD - A11
X96
X20
2 1
1
1
X75
1
4
2
X83
1
3
V1
X77
1
4
1 2
X84
X92
2
1
3
X78
1
2
V2
4
2
X88
1
3
X81
X93
2
2
1
X46
X97
X98
1
1
Figure 6-12: Connector points diagram for machine connector board

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
X20 X19 X14 X16
X22
X12 X21 X17 X15 X13
1
X10 X18
2
1
X11
INPUT CARD - A2 X12
5 9
2 X4 X3A X3B
A2
X4 A4
X1
8
1
2
X34
X2
1
2
X7
X3A
X70, X71,
X35
SFD ACTIVATION CARD - A4

X72, X73
X9
CPU CARD - A1
X3B
X8 4 3
X33
2 1
A1
S1 X36
X6 X5B X5A
X39
A3
X6 X5A
2 1 2 1
X30 X107
X38
X23
X37
3
X25
2
1
X12
R, S, T X5B
OUTPUT CARD - A3
X27 A12 X46
X17 X29 X26 X15
5
CABINET
X105 9 10
GROUND ROD (W1) COMPRESSOR CARD - A15
X25
X21
7 (to the cabinet)

X45
X28 X31 X29 X24 X26 1
X47 9 1 2
X49
1 2 1
X48
4
8
1 2 X32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
X44
CABINET CONNECTOR CARD - A12 10
BASE UNIT
GROUND ROD (W2)
41
61
51
64
63
62
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
50
49
48
45
44
43
47
46
42
N
N
11
E1
10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
E4
E3
E2
S3
S3
31
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
X99 X0
1
TERMINAL BLOCK X0
A15
X42 X41 X8
X0.11 X0.10 X0.9 X0.8 X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1
Figure 6-13: Cable and ground connection points diagram

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6 Image intensifier installation
NOTE:
Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four Spot Film Device support wheels,
using the nuts supplied, in such a way as to get a trolley like the one
shown in the Figure, for the purposes of the I.I. installation.
Figure 6-14

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.1 9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation
1. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled
table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
2. Use the lift control to lower the table until the I.I.'s fastening holes
are aligned with those on the plates. You should proceed cautiously
at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore
advisable to lower the table in small steps.
Figure 6-15
3. Fasten the I.I. to the plates with the screws, and tighten.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film

Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken screws "A" (Figure 6-16) on both sides to get
sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device, or screws "B"
(Figure 6-16) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position
has been obtained, tighten the screws.
B
Figure 6-16
5. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-17

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.2 16" fixed Image Intensi

Intensifier
fier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model)
1. Using the bolts supplied fix the two I.I. fixing plates as indicated in
Figure 6-18 taking into consideration the 530 mm (20.9") distance
between the two guides. Any adjustments to this distance may be
made with the plate-guide fixing screws.
530 (20.9")
Figure 6-18
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way
that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of
the machine.
3. Use the lift control to lower the table so that the I.I. fixing plates run
inside the Spot Film Device's walls and that the holes "A" (6 per side -
Figure 6-19) on the walls are aligned with the fastening holes on the
I.I. support guides. It is advisable to proceed cautiously at this stage
to prevent any damage to the I.I. occurring. It is therefore best to
lower the table by small steps.
4. Fasten the plates to the Spot Film Device's shoulders by means of the
screws provided.
5. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film
Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is
necessary, slacken the I.I. guide-plate support fastenings screws to
get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device or screws
"A" (6 per side - Figure 6-19) for longitudinal movements; once the
desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Figure 6-19
6. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left
side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip
provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so that they run
"parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the
machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-20

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
WARNING:
The I.I. lift movement can produce collision between I.I. and inner SFD
parts, proceed with maximum attention to the actions indicated in the
following paragraphs.
The positioning of the I.I. lift is obtained by a motor which movement is

stopped by 2 microswitches: S28 for upper position, S29 for lower
position. The I.I.-lift end run positions can be adjusted modifying the
microswitches activating cams.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.1 9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation
1. Check that:
− measuring chamber is removed
− grid in park position
− cassettes jaws completely open.
2. Connect the I.I. lift cable to X106 terminals.
3. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10.1.17) and by the compressor
joystick move the I.I. lift up to the upper and limit. Get out from
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage
plate
Figure 6-21
Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.
6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film
Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-22). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-22) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. this enables proper alignment of
the two plates.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
8. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-22
9. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never
less than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam.
10. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same, set cell 133 again
and move by joystick the I.I. lift on the upper end limit. Check that
during the I.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between
I.I. and internal SFD parts.
11. Connect the I.I. wiring, the angulation motor wiring and the lift
wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using
the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so
that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables
already in the machine.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.2 12” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
1. Check that:
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.
Spacer
Anchorage
plate
Figure 6-23
6. Lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the walls of the Spot Film
Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. anchorage plate are in line
with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-24). You should
proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the
I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Screw
the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the
screws provided.
7. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side - Figure 6-24) between the
I.I. anchoring plate and the lift plate. This enables proper alignment
of the two plates.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
I.I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where there are those already present.
Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures correct
sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-24

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.6.3.3 16” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation
1. Check that:
set-up.
4. Fix the I.I.'s two anchoring brackets as indicated in the Figure.
Anchoring
brackets
Figure 6-25
5. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).Place the remote-controlled

6. Use the lift control to lower the table by sliding the I.I. inside the
walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the anchoring
brackets are in line with the corresponding four holes in the lift plate
(Figure 6-26). You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid
any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the
table in small steps. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate
without tightening using the screws provided.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
I.I. longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary
spacers that are inserted where the bracket fastening screws are
(Figure 6-26). Tighten the screws at the slots' midline; this ensures
correct sideways alignment between the I.I. and the Spot Film Device.
Spacer
Figure 6-26

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.7 Installation of the Tube - Collimator group
NOTE:
International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray
beam must be greater than 2.5 mm Al.eq.
The Villa collimators have 0.5 mm Al.eq. filtration; The Ralco collimators
have 1.0 mm Al.eq. filtration;
Taking into consideration the filtration in the ray tube, as shown on its
technical plate, add the necessary filtration with the aluminium disks
provided with the tube or with the collimator kit; these disks can be
inserted into the ray output window.
NOTE:
The collimator kit consists of the following:
• collimator fastening cone H=17 mm (0.7")
• additional 0.5 mm Al filters
• collimator installation spacers of 1.5 mm (0.06") and of 3 mm (0.1")
• 6x25 and 6x30 fastening screws
1. Position the tube support in the corresponding fastening pin so as to

join together the two tube rotation release levers (Figure 6-27). Insert
the support screw onto the pin and tighten in the position that it is
best for the installation of the tube.
Fastening
pin
Support
screw
Release
levers
Tube
support
Figure 6-27

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
NOTE:
Point 2 only applies where the system is supplied with the Villa or the
Ralco collimator.
2. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the
collimator fastening cone (Figure 6-28). When doing this take due
account of the distance between the tube focus and the
cone/collimator plane; to ensure proper correspondence between the
field of the rays and the collimator light field, this distance must be
80±1 mm (3.15"±0.04"). To do this the collimator kit's spacers have to
be used (refer to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to
determine the point of focus). Fix in position with the collimator's
screws, taking account of the fact that the choice of screw length is
determined by the number of spacers employed.
WARNING:
Incorrect choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fastening of the
X-ray tube group where short screws are used or possible damage to the
casing if the screws used are too long.
3. Install the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks and
connect it to the X45 cable.
The collimator cable length is calculated to permit machine servicing
even when the collimator is out of beam. With the group at 0°
rotation, the corresponding micro safety switch inside the arm must
be in n.a. condition.
X-ray tube
Spacer
Collimator
fastening cone
Collimator
Figure 6-28

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
4. Wire up the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-29).

The cables must be arranged so that the tube can rotate without
them getting damaged. The abundance required for that to be
permitted will be hidden inside the arm's top cover. Make sure the
micro safety switch's cable with the tube at 0° is anchored to the arm
so that it is independent from the rest of the cables. These must be
as far as possible free from clamps, with just the minimum
indispensable, to prevent damage on tube rotation. It is advisable
only to use the fastening points indicated for the machine.
Figure 6-29
5. Once the cabling inside the X-ray tube support arm and checked its
functionality, after having tested the rotation of the X-ray tube
proceed to mount the arm cover (Figure 6-30 – 4 screws preset on the
column stand + 8 screws on the arm). To complete this operation it is
necessary to power the SID and remove the chain and its right side
support (Figure 6-31) gaining access to the fixing screws on the
column stand.
6. Join the cover to the X-ray tube support by the two front half circles
(Figure 6-30).
Only at this point proceed to the cabling of the cables inside the
column.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Figure 6-30
7. Open the chain, previously removed, and insert all cables coming
from the X-ray tube collimator group, making them run parallel.
8. Close and mount back the chain on its supports and then on the
column, having the cables coming out from the left side , on the back
of the chain (Figure 6-31).
9. Tighten the cables on the dedicated fixing point on the column,
following the routing of the cables already present; insert them in the
back chains.
Chain support
Figure 6-31

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.8 Mounting the covers
When installation is complete, mount the covers, referring to Figure 6-32

and Figure 6-33.
Install the compressor arm with the cup.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
*
(*) Cover supplied only where there is I.I. lift
Figure 6-32: Covers installation diagram (front view)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Figure 6-33: Covers installation diagram (rear view)

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.9 Tabletop assembly
6.9.1 Curved tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.

On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the
relative holes on the tabletop head mounts.
1. Remove the two iron beams at the extremities of the tabletop,

generally used to avoid possible plane deflections during transport.
2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight
washers.
3. Position the tabletop on the arms till the locking pins fit into the
relative holes (Figure 6-34).
4. Screw on all the eight pins the relative nuts and washers; lock tight.
Spacer "B"
Nuts and washers
Pins Spacer "B"
Figure 6-34

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
WARNING:
The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an
adaptation to avoid any collision risk between SFD cover and accessories
fixation device.
Proceed as follow:
a. By moving table top and scanning, put the patient handle at the
centre of the external part of upper SFD cover (Figure 6-35).
b. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between
upper SFD cover and fixation handle device: it must be not less than
2/3 mm (Figure 6-35). If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer
"B" as shows in Figure 6-34 up to obtain the desiderate size.
2/3mm
Figure 6-35
c. Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top
and accessories fixation increases because of the SFD small flexion
caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position
with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and
check that distance between SFD and accessories fixation is not less
than 4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as
indicated.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.9.2 Flat tabletop assembly
The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.

On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the
relative holes on the tabletop fixing plates.
1. Remove from the tabletop the four fixing plates "A".

2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight
washers.
3. Lock the fixing plates "A" on the support arms by the pins and
relevant nuts (Figure 6-36).
4. Lock the tabletop to the fixing plates by the eight screws removed on
item 1.
Nuts and washers

Spacer "B"
Fixing plates "A"
Pins Spacer "B"
Figure 6-36

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
WARNING:
The distance between table top and upper SFD cover, could require an
adaptation to avoid any collision risk.
Proceed as follow:
a. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between
upper SFD cover and tabletop profile: it must be not less than
2/3 mm. If distance is less than indicated, insert spacer "B" as shows
in Figure 6-36 up to obtain the desiderate size.
b. Move the table up to horizontal position. The gap between table top
and tabletop profile increases because of the SFD small flexion
caused by the I.I. weight. Charge the table top in horizontal position
with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.3-220.5 lbs) and
check that distance between SFD and tabletop profile is not less than
4/5 mm. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as
indicated.

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
6.10 Final verifications
Once the mechanical installation has been completed, it is necessary to

configure the Apollo table and check its functionality.
To do so proceed as follows:
• Check that the beam movement does not interfere with the basement
and if necessary implement the corrective actions described in the
procedure at the end of paragraph 6.5, point from 8 to 13
• Centre the middle beam into plastic sliding parts of the base when
tilting angle is negative (trendelembourg) as described on
paragraph 6.5, items from 10 to 15
• Enter the room dimension data (see paragraph 11.1)
• Enter configuration parameters (see paragraph 11.1)
• Measure the current real speed of the movements (see paragraph

11.1); this operation is fundamental in case the power line is 60Hz
• Check the functionality of all movements for the different functional

modalities (Spot film device, Tomography, Angiography, Digital) and
verify the anticollision safeties
• After having completing the calibration of the X-ray tube, implement

centering procedures for X-ray tube – Collimator - Serial Changer - II
(see chapter 19)
• Check that the cassette pusher position is correctly adjusted in

function of the cassette type used.
It must press in such a way the cassette position is maintained also
with table in vertical position, but without create a critical condition
for cassette ejection. The check must be done with minimum 18x24
(8"x10") and 35x43 (14"x17") cassettes size. If the pusher adjustment
is not optimized, unlock the 6 fixing screws and slide the pusher
plate "A" in the required direction (Figure 6-37).

SERVICE MANUAL
Installation
Pusher plate "A"
Figure 6-37
• Check centering for the different cassette format (see chapter 19); if
necessary correct as needed.

SERVICE MANUAL
The functioning logic of the table
7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC

LOGIC OF THE
TABLE
The Apollo table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge
management and control circuit.
The circuit is based on PCB’s called:
• A1 CPU PCB
• A2 "input" PCB
• A3 "output" PCB
• A4 Spot Film Device motor "power driver" PCB (not present in "All
Digital" version)
• A14 "control panel" PCB
• A15 "compressor motor command" PCB (not present in the version
without compressor).
• A16 "additional collimator filters control" PCB (for collimator with
motorized additional filters movement version only).
It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCB’s listed above is from
their names and they are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception
of the control panel PCB.
Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that
could come in useful, is given below.
The "control panel" A14 PCB is fitted with a Motorola MC68332

processor and a 128K x8 Eprom.
The job of the program contained in this Eprom is to decode the state of
the joystick and the keys and send this information to the CPU on the
CAN BUS.
Moreover, its job is also to receive the status of the led and the graphic
and alphanumeric strings to show on the display, again from the CPU.
The A1"CPU" PCB is also equipped with a Motorola MC68332 processor

the job of which is to act as the main processor and a 512K x8 Eprom.
The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the
equipment including, as said before, dialoguing with the control panel.
Also present are:
• a flash eprom containing the alarm history and the machine cycle
times
• an EEprom containing the equipment set up data and the positions
related to MODE 1-2-3 keys.
• a Ram containing the date and time. Furthermore, the data regarding
the alarm history and the machine cycles are initially deposited in
the Ram and every ten minutes they are transferred to the flash
eprom.
(Rev. 3) 7-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a

Supervisor microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the
supervision and serial and parallel control program for the channels
responsible for the movements.
The release of the equipment management software contained in the

Eprom on the CPU is shown on the control panel display for three
seconds when the equipment is powered up.
APOLLO 7-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
7.1 Functioning sequences
7.1.1 Powering up and initialisation sequence
On powering up the electronics of the CPU, the control panel, the input
PCB and part of the output PCB is powered through the T2 transformer.
At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the
checks that can make sure all the conditions are regular.
If that is the case, both the main processor and the controller activate the
respective "ready" relay after an interval of three seconds.
The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series.
One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by
the series of these two relays.
When they are activated, they therefore permit the energising of the K1L
that, through the closure of its contacts, will power the table's power
circuits.
At this point, the procedure for the initialisation of the Spot Film Device
begins the purpose of which is to move the inside parts of the Spot Film
Device to the default positions.
While this is happening, i.e. from the time the power circuits have been
powered up and when the organs of the Spot Film Device have reached
the positions defined, all the movements of the table are disabled and the
control panel's display shows the flashing message.
"Initialisation. Please wait"
When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed, the control
panel display changes and shows the data for the active mode.
All the table movements and the functions will, at this point, be enabled.
(Rev. 3) 7-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
7.1.2 Activation sequence for a movement
When a joystick, enabled to activate a movement is pressed, 2

microswitches are activated simultaneously.
The first sends the movement activation signal, along the CAN BUS line,
from the control panel to the main PCB.
The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either
from the main processor or the controller.
If all the conditions are in order, the processor will activate the circuits
that control the engines.
Once the feedback potmeter is launched it informs the processor about
the position and speed of the movement itself.
In order to indicate the working conditions, all the outputs are fitted with
a signalling led that lights up when an output, whether a movement
output or a controlling output for an external accessory, is active.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the below is useful
for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
APOLLO 7-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAM

POWERING UP SEQUENCE SIMPLE MOVEMENT
Table power up Movement Joystick NO

Electronics power activation
supply SF OK →
T2 ON YES ↓ ↓
Send SF circuit
Hardware Opening NO
Check NO Signalling Data serial →
electronics OK → ALARMS SF OK
YES YES ↓ ↓
↓ Movement or
3 sec. ↑ logic output NO
READY relay ON activation →
K1L ON SF OK
YES ↓ ↓
HW power activation NO READY relay
Hardware electronics SF OK → power down
NO Turning off
check Signalling
→ READY relay YES ↓
OK ALARMS
YES Motor movement NO
↓ SF OK →
End of message YES ↓ ↑
"Initialisation"
SW table motor Potmeter feed back NO
movement enabling SF OK →
YES ↓ ↑
Joystick release
output power down NO
Movement stop →
SF reclosure SF OK
(Rev. 3) 7-5 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
7.2 Fault Conditions
Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in

operation:
• Condition fault
• Operating fault
• Power circuit faults.
These three different situations cause the consequences that are

analysed below.
7.2.1 Generation of a condition alarm
While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one
of the accessories connected to it.
If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example:
the generator is not "ready" within the set time), a few movements are
disabled by the SW and the relative alarm flashes on the display of the
control panel accompanied by an intermittent "beep".
To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary
to push the reset joystick downwards twice.
The first time silences the "beep", the second resets the alarm and
restores the normal conditions.
7.2.2 Generation of
of a operating alarm
If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF

control or by other components interacting with the processor, that could
seriously compromise the functioning of the equipment, the READY
relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control panel.
This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault.
A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is.
To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must
be turned off.
APOLLO 7-6 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
7.2.3 Generation
Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit
If a movement of the table or the Spot Film Device should for any reason
go over the SW run determined by the potmeter, an emergency end of run
will be intercepted.
This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the
consequent opening of the power control input (X15 pin 10).
This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the
controller and generate flashing alarm 080 on the control panel display.
It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the
alarm situation.
After removing the cause of the failure, the powering up procedure after
the power cutting out must be followed in order to restore the normal
operating conditions described in the relevant chapter.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is

useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms.
(Rev. 3) 7-7 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
CONDITION FUNCTIONAL POWER

ALARM ALARM ALARM
Malfunction that is: Malfunction that is: Malfunction that is:

resettable - Single Fault Table emergency
- Component
Flashing Deenergising:
alarm ← Turning off K1L
on display READY relay
Input opening
Joystick reset: ↑ Alarm X15 pin 10
- 1st beep OFF on display:
- 2nd beep alarm flashing Alarm on display:
OFF NON resettable 080 flashing
Cause of NO Turning off Turning off

malfunction: equipment equipment
→
removed
YES ↓ Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Restore
normal operating
conditions
APOLLO 7-8 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
IN/OUT Interface connection
8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

CONNECTION
All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as:
generator, TV chain etc. are connected to the input and output PCB’s by
means of the X0 terminal clamp.
The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.
8.1 Output signals from the Apollo table
The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit

(ULN2803) NPN active at 0 V. No circuits with pull up resistances of over
30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding 100 mA may be connected
to these outputs.
X0 Connector Description
34 X27 pin 5 Digital reconstruction
35 X27 pin 24 2nd tomographic speed set
36 X27 pin 6 3rd tomographic speed set
37 X27 pin 25 Request for fluoro
38 X27 pin 7 Exposure request
39 X27 pin 26 Preparation request
40 X27 pin 8 Digital preparation request
41 X27 pin 27 Request for second step to be taken
42 X27 pin 9 1st tomographic speed set
43 X27 pin 28 4th tomographic speed set
44 X27 pin 10 7° tomography angle set
48 X27 pin 12 Rays ON without request
49 X27 pin 31 Man/auto fluoro Kv selection
52 X27 pin 14 Angio steps
53 X27 pin 33 Motion detection
54 X27 pin 15 Recursive filter x0 /
Collimator additional filter 2 mm Al
Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al +
0.1 mm Cu
Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al +
0.2 mm Cu
(Rev. 4) 8-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
The manual fluoro Kv control output is dependent on an analogical

circuit (TLC271) with a range of voltages from 1.8 Vdc to 6.5 Vdc. It is
possible to apply a maximum load of 5 mA.
59 X27 pin 19 Man. Fluoro Kv control analogue
The control outlets for the room monitor depend on an analogue circuit
(TLC274) with a resistance range from 0 Ω to 4.7 KΩ. It is possible apply
a max load of 3 W.
61 X28 pin 1 Mon. Brightness control analogue
62 X28 pin 2 Mon. Contrast control analogue
The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that

must be polarised. The maximum voltage and current applied must not
exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.
28 X27 pin 3 Common for im. Scan reverse circuit
26 X27 pin 4 Right/left image scan reverse
27 X27 pin 22 Up/Down image scan reverse
32 X27 pin 1 Common for Zoom I.I. circuit
31 X27 pin 20 Maximum Zoom (minimum field)
30 X27 pin 2 Medium zoom (medium field)
29 X27 pin 21 Minimum Zoom (maximum field)
APOLLO 8-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
8.2 Input signals towards the Apollo table
The inputs below depend on an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN

active at 0 V. This circuit formed with 24Vdc-referred pull-up resistors.
The typical absorption of these circuits is equal to 10 mA max.
12 X13 pin 1 Generator ready for rays
13 X13 pin 2 X-ray on
14 X13 pin 3 Digital work station
15 X13 pin 4 Spot Film Device work station
16 X13 pin 5 Ceiling stand safety (*)
17 X13 pin 6 External safety barrier (*)
18 X13 pin 7 Collimator additional filters out of position
19 X13 pin 8 Cassette presence micro switch ("Sensing"
Chest Stand)
(*) Jumpered to ground by default to disable the feature.
(Rev. 6) 8-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO 8-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Configuration access and description of the data groups
9 CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND

DESCRIPTION OF THE D
DATA
ATA GROUPS
All the data necessary for the configuration, operation and adjustment of
the Apollo table, including the Checksum that is updated every time the
data varies, are contained in the EEprom.
When powering up, the data are compared, the Checksum of the data is
verified again and it is compared with that currently in the EEprom. If
there is no correspondence between the two pieces of data the alarm 090
is generated.
The data contained on the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups".
There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each of these groups.
A storage position will therefore be configured with three figures of which:
0 00
↓ ↓
Number of the group Position of the cell
To access the read only function of the data contained in these cells it
will be enough to position the switch of the group of dip-switches on the
CPU at ON.
In order to be able to edit, therefore write new data in the cells, as well as
activating the switches, it will be necessary to key in an access code.
In the table below the subdivisions of groups of data and their functions,
the dip-switches to activate and the access codes to be keyed-in are
listed.
WARNING:
The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these
codes so that non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the
memory cells and changing them, thereby causing the equipment to
malfunction.
The version of the installed software in the Eprom on the CPU is shown
on the display for 3 seconds every time the machine is turned on:
Software rel. X.XX
DD – MM – YY HH.MM
where:
• Row 1 = version of the software also shown on the label on the
Eprom
• Row 2 = date and time of the compilation of the operating files.
(Rev. 3) 9-1 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
For any reporting of a malfunction or request for technical help, always

indicate the version of the software on the equipment.
The four access codes are :

C1 = 9006
C2 = 2573
C3 = 8425
C4 = 1541
The following table shows the dip switch combinations – access code and
the functions of the various groups.
Dip switch Code Group Subroutine

1 C1 101 Potmeter adjustment
2 C2 201 Installation data
3 C1 301 PDI controlled motor setting data
4 C2 711 “time” setting -Reset alarm memory
1+2 C1 401 Equipment dimension setting
Run shutters and cassette
1 + 3 C3 701 Eeprom copying
1 + 4 751 Alarm history visualisation
2 + 3 C3 721 Spot Film Device and table life test
2 + 4 C4 731 Remote service function
3 + 4 C4 850 Equipment cycles and time display and resetting
The above mentioned groups are divided into positions.

The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below.
Group Position and function

Potmeter adjustment From 101 to 133 setting of the maximum and
minimum of the various potmeters
Installation data From 201 to 265 typical settings linked to the
installation and the equipment
PDI controlled motor setting data From 301 to 400 setting data for control of motors
with PDI function
“Time” setting 711 = Time and date display
Reset alarm memory 712 = Year setting
713 = Month setting
714 = Day setting
715 = Hour setting
716 = Minute setting
717 = Second setting
718 = Clock correction
719 = Reset alarm memory
APOLLO 9-2 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Group Position and function

Equipment dimension setting From 401 to 686 dimensions and run setting
Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying 701 = Copy from EEprom to Ram
702 = Copy from Ram to EEprom
Alarm history visualisation Extended diagnosis (from 1 to 20)
751 = Position and alarm data display
752 = Spot Film Device part position and function
display
753 = Joystick display
754 = Digital input display
755 = Digital output display
Reduced diagnosis (from 21 to 100)
800 = Alarm data display (2 alarms)
Spot Film Device and table life 721 = Life test choice
test 722 = Spot Film Device life test (not available on "All
Digital" version)
723 = Table life test
Remote service function 731 = Remote service function
Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display
and resetting 851 = Time display
852 = Time display
From 853 to 867 resetting cycles one field at a time
(Rev. 3) 9-3 APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO 9-4 (Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and adjustment of group 100 data
10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP
100 DATA
To access the data contained in group 100 the procedures described
below must be followed.
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 1 in the dip-switch assembly
in the CPU PCB to ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
101 (369) -40.0° 2090 / 4096

Angulation min (head side)
where:
101 = number of the group and the position
(369) = value presently in the memory
-40.0° = position that the organ has to reach
corresponding to the value at minimum
2090/ = current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
Angulation… = brief description of the function of the
selected cell.
The following will only be shown for the cells referring to the
adjustment of collimator movements (from 117 to 122 included ):
117 (492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090 / 4096

Collimator width min (closed)
where:
117 =number of the group and the position
(492) = value presently in the memory
1178 mm = current position of the SID
000 mm = position to reach
2090/ = current value of the potmeters expressed on
a scale with a maximum value of 4096
Collimator… = brief description of the function of the
selected cell.

SERVICE MANUAL
WARNING:
The SID value must be 1080 mm (42.5") during adjustment. If the value
is different when the MODE2 acceptance of storage to memory key is
pressed, the value is not accepted in the memory and alarm "088 Wrong
SID" will be shown on the display.
The value of the position to reach varies as the SID varies so the SID
value is only correct when it is 1080 mm (42.5"). This value is the
dimension that the ray field (and light field for the convenience of the
measurement) must have at tabletop level.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase

and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said beforehand, it is not possible in this phase to edit any
setting or perform any movement.
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:
002 0000
Key in access code
where:
002 = number of the position for the input of the access codes
0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the

position for the inputting of the code.

SERVICE MANUAL
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.

If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the inputting
of the last digit, the flashing CORR message disappears, what is
written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data
remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time,
the display will show the message:
Access to groups 101 – 301 – 401
that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400,
thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in, in function
of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the
screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied
In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group 100 abandoned on
entry to position 002.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1 Potmeter adjustment
As said before, the Apollo table bases the control of its movements on
the feedback generated by the potmeters.
These potmeters must therefore be adjusted, the reference value of the
maximum and end run voltages must, that is to say, be stored in the
corresponding cells in the EEprom.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this
group.
It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of
the potmeters by using the compressor movement joystick.
In this program, only this joystick will be active (with the exception of the
adjustment of the beam and middle beam movements and collimator as
described further on) and the motor that is activated will depend on the
cell that is set.
If the joystick is pushed upwards, the direction of the set movement will
be towards its maximum and the potmeter value shown on the display
will increase.
If the joystick is pushed downwards, the direction of the movement will
be the opposite, towards its minimum, and the potmeter value will
decrease.
In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in
the adjustment software and cannot be modified.
To carry out the adjustment, and therefore memorise the new potmeter
value, key MODE2 must be pressed.
The display will show the following for three seconds:
**** ACCEPTED ****

to confirm that the memorisation has been successful.
At the same time, the data in brackets at the side of the group number
and position is updated with the new value.
WARNING:
During the adjustment phase, the anticollision program is not active so,
before performing any movement, make sure that that there is not risk of
collision during it.
Furthermore, since the software end runs are set in this program no
stopping on them is activated.
If the set run is exceed, the movement will hit the emergency switch
causing the equipment to stop.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.1 Cell data and list
The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's
predelivery testing of the equipment.
These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set.
It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of
group 400, but in practice this operation is never performed. In fact this
modifies the functional characteristics of the table.
Furthermore, in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where
there is a malfunction in the movement electronics control, there are
hardware emergency switches positioned in such a way as to cut in when
the software end run does not stop the movement. These positions break
the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of
the K1L remote switch). Thus any modification of the run limits also
entails the mechanical repositioning of these switches.
In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown.
Cell Movement Joyst.direct Value Movement direction Default.lim

101 Angulation LOW min Anticlockwise (head -40.0°
end)
102 Angulation HIGH max Clockwise (feet side) +40.0°
103 Scan LOW min Left (head end) -800 mm
104 Scan HIGH max Right (feet side) +800 mm
105 Main beam LOW min Withdrawal / decrease 135 mm
106 Main beam HIGH max Extension/ increase 683 mm
107 Middle beam LOW min Withdrawal / decrease 135 mm
108 Middle beam HIGH max Extension/ increase 740 mm
109 Cass.width WB (*) N.A. min N.A. 140 mm
110 Cass.width WB N.A. max N.A. 465 mm
111 Height cass. WB N.A. min N.A. 140 mm
112 Height cass. WB N.A. max N.A. 465 mm
SID (a) 1016 mm
113 LOW min LOW
SID (b) 1106 mm
SID (a) 1516 mm
114 HIGH max HIGH
SID (b) 1806 mm
115 Transversal LOW min Inside -160 mm
tabletop
116 Transversal HIGH max Outside +160 mm
tabletop
(*) The cells 109 ÷ 112 are referred to the Sensing tray potentiometers present into Wall
Bucky (optional features).
(a) Apollo table version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1")
(b) Apollo table version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")

SERVICE MANUAL
Cell Movement Joyst.direct. Value Movement direction Default.Lim

Square Iris
117 Collimator width LOW min Closed 000 mm 000 mm
118 Collimator width HIGH max Open 490 mm 415 mm
119 Height collim. LOW min Closed 000 mm 000 mm
120 Height collim. HIGH max Open 490 mm 415 mm
121 Optional LOW min Closed N.A. 85 mm
Iris collim.
122 Optional HIGH max Open N.A. 570 mm
Iris collim.
123 Compressor LOW/HIGH min Descent/Rise 00.0 kg
124 Compressor LOW/HIGH max Descent/Rise 15.5 kg
125 Grid LOW min Park direction 000 mm
126 Grid HIGH max Field direction 510 mm
127 Cassette close LOW min Closes 146 mm
128 Cassette close HIGH max Opens 463 mm
129 Cross LOW min Left (head end) -65.0 mm
subdivision
130 Cross HIGH max Right (feet side) +65.0 mm
subdivision
131 Shutters LOW min Towards opening 000.0 mm
132 Shutters HIGH max Towards overlap 455.0 mm
(cross subdiv.)
133 Optional LOW/HIGH min/max Descent/Rise Switch high=ON
I.I. lift Switch low=ON
NOTE:
Position 133 does not refer to a potmeter but is used for the adjustment
of the switches of the end runs of the I.I. lift assembly when fitted. When
one switch is active on the display the ON value is shown, while the other
has the OFF value.
As said before, the default value that the movement must reach at the
minimum and maximum is shown on the display.
Once this position has been reached, the potmeter must indicate a near
value (a tolerance of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the
following table.
If not, release the potmeter, reach the position required with the
movement then turn the potmeter until reaching the indicated value.
Lock the potmeter in position and store the value to memory.
Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potmeter
is not damaged mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed
its mechanical stop, and the potmeter is used in the central area, thus
avoiding using the limits that often turn out to be critical.

SERVICE MANUAL
As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the

minimum and maximum positions, it will be shown how to measure the
value to reach, on the next few pages by means of pictures and
descriptions.
In some cases, this measurement is different from what is shown on the
display, as shown in the last column of the proceeding table.
This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations
having table points of origin as a reference but, in some case, it is
intricate and difficult to make these measurements in practice.
This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been
chosen to facilitate the calibration.
Cell Movement Value Movement direction Potmeter value
101 Angulation min Anticlockwise (head end) approx.334

102 Angulation max Clockwise (feet side) approx.3762
103 Scan min Left (head end) approx.117
104 Scan max Right (feet side) approx.3979
105 Main beam min Withdrawal / decrease approx.350
106 Main beam max Extension/ increase approx.3745
107 Middle beam min Withdrawal / decrease approx.360
108 Middle beam max Extension/ increase approx.3735
109 Cass.width WB min
110 Cass.width WB max Relevant data are functions of the Sensing
111 Height cass. WB min tray model used.
112 Height cass. WB max
SID (a) approx.341
113 min LOW
SID (b) approx.50
SID (a) approx.3754
114 max HIGH
SID (b) approx.4030
115 Transversal min Inside approx.232
tabletop
116 Transversal max Outside approx.3863
tabletop
117 Collimator width min Closed approx.790
118 Collimator width max Open approx.3160
119 Height collim. min Closed approx.880
120 Height collim. max Open approx.3050
(a) Apollo table version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1")
(b) Apollo table version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")

SERVICE MANUAL
Cell Movement Value Movement direction Potmeter value
121 Optional min Closed approx.950

Iris collim.
122 Optional max Open approx.3370
Iris collim.
123 Compressor min Descent/Rise approx.1880
124 Compressor max Descent/Rise approx.3520
125 Grid min Park direction approx.205
126 Grid max Field direction approx.3710
127 Cassette close min Closes approx.360
128 Cassette close max Opens approx.3730
129 Cross min Left (head end) approx.1430
subdivision
130 Cross max Right (feet side) approx.2640
subdivision
131 Shutters min Towards opening approx.330
132 Shutters max Towards overlap (cross approx.3740
subdiv.)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.2 ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102)
To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the covers of the

scan group.
At this point, the Spot Film Device support plate can be seen showing the
column tilting reference marks.
The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of
the column to correspond to reference lines on the Spot Film Device
support.
With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of
the soundness of the min and max positions reached.
Take the column towards the minimum (head side), select cell 101 and
store to memory.
Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell
102.
-40° +40°
Reference
marks
Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.3 SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)
Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must:

1. Move the table into a horizontal position with the lift higher than the
minimum position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over its
full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the
floor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group.
3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be
found between the outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of
the Spot Film Device base plate. The point to be reached is 52 mm (2.0").
Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the carriage to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
1652 mm (65.0") measurement among the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in the cell 104.
1652mm
(65.0")
52mm
(2.0")
Figure 10-2: SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.4 MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment

(cells 105 ÷ 108)
When the main beam movement cells are select, as for all the other
adjustments, the movement is enabled by the compressor joystick.
Since just the main beam movement would make it impossible to reach
some positions, it is possible also to activate the middle beam movement
by means of the SID joystick.
The movements cannot take place at the same time, but the activation of
one excludes the other.
To carry out the minimum main beam and middle beam adjustment, it is
necessary to remove the II and, if a lift is present, bring the II attachment
plate to the high position.
Move the main beam in such a way that there is access to the verification
of the middle beam position. Move the middle beam downwards until it
ends up flat, while checking it with a bubble level (Figure 10-3); select
cell 107 and memorise the minimum middle beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-3: Minimum middle beam position (cell 107)

SERVICE MANUAL
At this point bring the main beam downwards, in such a way as it ends
up flat, while checking with a bubble level (Figure 10-4).
Select cell 105 and memorise the minimum main beam value.
Bubble level
Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105)
At this point, take the main beam towards the maximum until it is
perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles (Figure 10-5); select the cell 106 and store the maximum value to
memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106)

SERVICE MANUAL
WARNING:
In the main beam and middle beam adjustment phase, there are risks
that could damage the equipment very seriously.
In fact the combination of the main beam and middle beam movements
carried out incorrectly could cause a collision between the structure of
the main beam and the structure of the middle beam or a collision
between the main beam motor tube and the structure of the middle
beam. While in the first case the main beam-middle beam collision safety
switch protects the equipment, in the second a manoeuvring error would
cause irreparable damage to the main beam motor tube by bending it.
It is therefore fundamental, in addition to paying the utmost attention
before and during the activation of the movements, to follow the
instructions below to the letter.
At this point take the main beam towards the bottom until the extension
of the mechanical tube reaches 430 mm (16.9") (Figure 10-6) to be
measured between the extreme limit of the actuator and the upper edge
of the outside tube of the actuator.
430mm
(16.9")
Figure 10-6

SERVICE MANUAL
Select cell 108 and take the middle beam towards the maximum until it
is perpendicular to the ground, using a bubble level to check it is at right
angles; at this point store the maximum value to memory.
Bubble level
Figure 10-7: Maximum middle beam position (cell 108)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.5 SENSING TRAY WIDTH CASSETTE

CASSETTE potmeter adjustment
(cells 109 − 110) (Wall Bucky option)
NOTE:
The Sensing tray device is not part of Apollo table. The min and max
dimensions, used as reference for the potmeter adjustment, must be
checked and stored before to proceed in the adjustment.
Measure the min and max width cassette locking jaws dimension. Store
the relevant values into cells 419 and 420.
Set cell 109 and move the width cassette locking jaws totally closed.
Verify that the size is the same value than the one indicated on the
Apollo display.
Store the value.
Set cell 110 and move the width cassette locking jaws totally open. Verify
that the size is the same value than the one indicated on the Apollo
display.
Store the value.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.6 SENSING TRAY HEIGHT CASSETTE potmeter adju

adjustment
stment
(cells 111 − 112) (Wall Bucky option)
NOTE:
The Sensing tray device is not part of Apollo table. The min and max
dimensions, used as reference for the potmeter adjustment, must be
checked and stored before to proceed in the adjustment.
Measure the min and max height cassette locking jaws dimension. Store
the relevant values into cells 421 and 422.
Set cell 111 and move the height cassette locking jaws totally closed.
Apollo display.
Store the value.
Set cell 112 and move the height cassette locking jaws totally open.
Apollo display.
Store the value.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.7 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment

(cells 113 – 114)
10.1.7.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1")
Remove the rear SID cover.

Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has
to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column
and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is
42 mm (1.6"). Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the
542 mm (21.3") measurement between the same references used for the
minimum.
Store the value in cell 114.
542mm
42mm (21.3")
(1.6")
Figure 10-8: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment

(cells 113 – 114)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.7.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")
Remove the rear SID cover.

Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has
to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column
and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is
39 mm (1.5"). Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the
minimum.
739mm
39mm (29.1")
(1.5")
Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment

(cells 113 – 114)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.8 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment

(cells 115 – 116)
Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.

Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be
measured between the aluminium tabletop support arm fixing block and
the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement tube.
The distance to be reached is 270 mm (10.6"). Select the cell 115 and
memorise the minimum value.
Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the
minimum.
Store the value 116 in the cell.
270mm
(10.6")
590mm
(23.2")
Figure 10-10: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment

(cells 115 – 116)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.9 WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118)
The WIDTH limitation of the collimator means the limitation

corresponding to the right and left of the patient.
Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to
122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 1080 mm (42.5") from table top
surface (dimensions shown on the display).
Select cell 117 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator
until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be
detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop.
The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 118.
NOTE:
The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted" will
appear.
When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on
automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.
Focus
Table Top surface
min = cell 117

max = cell 118
Figure 10-11: COLLIMATOR WIDTH potmeter adjustment

(cells 117 – 118)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.10 HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment

(cells 119 – 120)
The HEIGHT limitation of the collimator means the limitation

corresponding to the head and feet of the patient.
surface (dimensions shown on the display.
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum,
that must be stored in position 120.
NOTE:
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
Focus
Table Top surface
min = cell 119

max = cell 120
Figure 10-12: HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment

(cells 119 – 120)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.11 IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter

adjustment (cells 121 – 122)
Iris potmeters will only be adjusted if the table is fitted with collimator to
limit the square-rectangular and circular fields.
surface (dimensions shown on the display).
Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that
must be stored in position 122.
NOTE:
otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will
appear.
Focus
Table Top surface
min = cell 121

max = cell 122
Figure 10-13: IRIS COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment

(cells 121 – 122)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.12 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment

(cells 123 – 124)
To perform this adjustment a compression dynamometer with a range of

0 to 20 kg (0 to 44.1 lbs) is required.
Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on
it.
The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store
the value in position 123.
Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) as shown on
the dynamometer is exerted; store the value in position 124.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.13 GRID potme

potmeter
ter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.

Move the grid holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that
must be found between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line
notch on the upper edge of the shoulders. The point to be reached is
460 mm (18.1").
Select cell 125 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the small frame to the maximum position (field) and find the
50 mm (1.9") measurement among the same references used for the
minimum.
460mm
(18.1")
50mm
(1.9")
Grid centre
(park position)
Centre line notch
Grid centre
(field position)
Figure 10-14: GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.14 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128)
Remove the upper lid of the Spot Film Device.

Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette
close guides are fully closed and the gripping switch is not activated.
Store the value.
Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required
measurement indicated on the display is achieved.
Store the value.
WARNING:
The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potmeter must be carried
out with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision perfectly
centred.
When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to
ensure the guides do not violently strike the walls of the Spot Film Device
but just brush them slightly.
Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the Spot
Film Device PCB A4.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.14.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment
The gripping switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the

cassette and the driving belts.
This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette
guides of approximately 6 kg (13.2 lbs).
Insert a cassette with height side 24 cm (10") to make visible the
reference scale when the switch is activated.
To comply with this value, the scale on the cam must coincide with the
position 40° ±10° to be read from the graded scale on the volute.
Reference
scale
Graded
scale
Figure 10-15: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment
Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping

system:
1. Move the table into a vertical position.
2. Insert a 35x43 (14"x17") cassette (35/14" height side direction)
resting it on the lower guide.
NOTE:
The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped
with. This is because the check must be done under the worst operating
conditions (maximum weight in the lifting mode).
If the 35x43 (14"x17") size is not used, perform the test with the heaviest
format among those which are in use.

SERVICE MANUAL
3. Operate the cassette insertion control.
If the adjustment is correct, the switch must never cut in while the
cassette is moving upwards until both the guides are touching the
cassette and an approximately 10° movement scale movement seen on
the graded scale has been performed.
If this is not the case, work on the switch activating cam to bring its
intervention forward or delay it.
WARNING:
An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 kg / 11.0 lbs) causes the
switch to cut in early during the test described above.
An adjustment that is too high (> 7 kg / 15.4 lbs) causes pressure that is
to great between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has
difficulty moving.

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.15 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130)
Insert a cassette between the guides with height side 24 cm (10") on

which there is a centre line and grip it.
Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of
the cassette is 65 mm (2.6") away from the centre of the cassette resting
surface; store the value.
Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction
with respect to the centre line; store the value.
Figure 10-16: CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.16 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.

Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that
corresponds with an opening equal to 475 mm (18.7") (Figure 10-17);
select cell 131 and memorise the minimum value.
475mm
(18.7")
Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 131)
Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read
the measurement of 9 mm (0.3") (Figure 10-18); store the value in cell
132.
9mm
(0.3")
Figure 10-18: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 132)

SERVICE MANUAL
10.1.17 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133)
Check that:
• measuring chamber is removed
• grid in park position
• cassettes jaws completely open.
By the compressor joystick move the I.I. lift up to lower end run.
The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I. must be never less
than 5 mm (0.2"); if necessary adjust the lower end run cam (switch
S29).
Move the I.I. lift to the upper end limit (switch S28). Check that during
the movement does not happens any collision between I.I. and internal
SFD parts.
The cams for end run microswitches position can be modified to obtain:
• minimum distance between skin and I.I.
• the coincidence between input I.I. plain and film level to avoid
parallax error due by oblique projections.

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION

FUNCTION OF ALL
GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)
To access the reading of the data contained in the various groups (except
for group 100) the following procedure must be followed.
Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, position the switch or switches of the
dip-switch group on the CPU PCB, relating to the data group for
which access is required, at ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The control panel display will show:
XXX YYYYYY
Description of the cell set
where:
XXX = number of the group and the position
YYYYYY = value currently in the memory.
3. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase

and decrease the number of cells to be displayed, respectively. As
said previously, it is not possible to modify any settings.
Data editing
1. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. When this time has
elapsed, the display will show:
002 0000
Key in access code
where:
002 = number of the position for the input of the
access codes
0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9).
2. Press key MODE2. The display will show the flashing message
CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code.

SERVICE MANUAL
3. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means
of the keys that, in this condition, become numbers in
accordance with the schematic below.
This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the

position for the inputting of the code.
4. Press key MODE2 to confirm.

If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. of the
inputting of the last digit, the flashing CORR message
disappears, what is written disappears from the displays and the
non-edited data remains in the memory.
However, if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified
time, the display will show the message:
Access to groups XXX – YYY - ZZZ
that indicates that it is possible to access groups, thanks to the
use of the code that has just been keyed in, to the relative groups
in function of which switches are positioned at ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on
the screen, instead:
Code incorrect: access denied
In this case, the operations must repeated from number 2.
5. If the code is correct, hold key MODE1 down for one second.
The display returns to the position of the group abandoned on
entry to position 002.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up
this group.
To modify the data, press the MODE2 key, the flashing message
CORR will appear on the display. By using the numeric keys key in
the data required and press the MODE2 key again within 15 sec. to
confirm the correction.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.1 Group 200 – Installation data
The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment.

Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
To ensure the installation functions properly the correct values must be
input.
11.1.1 Function of the parameters of group 200
As the data contained in the cells of this group can be modified to render
the machine fit for the installation requirements, the default data set
during the table adjustment in the factory is shown in the second to last
column in the table. The last column is for the service technician to take
note any variations from the default data.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
Cell Display Function description Unit Default Setting

201 Left wall - table center distance The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included mm -4000
in this data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop
measured when flat.
202 Right wall – table center distance The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be mm 4000
included in this data. The table centre corresponds with the centre of the
tabletop measured when flat.
203 Floor - ceiling distance Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind mm 5000
the lowest point in the movement of the X-ray tube.
204 Floor-tube safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from mm 200
the floor that the X-ray tube can reach.
205 Ceiling safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from mm 200
the ceiling that each component of the table can reach.
206 Walls safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced mm 200
from the left and right walls that each element of the table can reach.
207 II-floor safety distance This data determines the minimum distance that the II will be able to mm 100
reach from the floor.
208 The ascend band II-floor collision The ascent band is ideally positioned over the value stored in cell 207. mm 60
During tilting, when one side of the II enters this band, the movement is
modified with respect to the way it operates normally to ensure the II gets
out of the ascent band preventing it from reaching the safety zone (cell
207) by causing the machine to stop.
209 I.I. vertical dimension The size measured between the upper surface of the II (input screen zone) mm 650
and the more distant lower part (TV camera coverage zone or angulation
motor cover in case of 9” I.I.)
210 I.I. bottom half size The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the mm 250
measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the
television camera radius must be input).

SERVICE MANUAL

211 Tube equivalent radius at 0° The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Remember mm 340
however that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm
(13.4") from the tube attachment shaft, the minimum data that can be
put in is 340 mm (13.4").
212 Casing/collimator eq. radius if not at The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured mm 350
0° between the tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tube-
collimator assembly. Typically the point corresponds with the collimator
sharp edge furthest from the shaft.
213 Focus - tube shaft distance Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing mm 0
pin.
214 I.I. minimum field Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum mm 158
enlargement).
215 I.I. medium field Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium mm 250
enlargement).
216 I.I. max field Insert the rated value of the I.I. rated field in the case of a three-field mm 314
intensifier. If a four-field II is installed the field value must be input
with minimum enlargement.
217 I.I. max field for 4 fields This data is only used by the software when cell 252 is set at 1 (four-field mm 410
II). In this case insert the value of the nominal II field.
218 Width-height collimator format This data makes it possible to modify the opening of the collimator in the mm 0
correct radiography collimations. It has no influence on the opening of the
minimum, of the maximum and on the II formats.
219 Cassette exposure position correction If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of mm 0
the same number, the correction value required must be input into this
cell.
220 0 – MAX position distance by grid This data makes it possible to centre the grid on the rays perfectly. The mm 50
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter maximum
and the 0 grid position.

SERVICE MANUAL

221 Park – MIN distance by grid This data makes it possible to position the grid properly in the park. The mm 10
data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter minimum
and the grid parking position.
222 Total grid oscillation length Since the grid performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in mm 20
this cell makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation.
Since the grid oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total
oscillation has a value that is equal to double the half run calculated
from the 0 point.
223 Exposure delay after grid start This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid with sec. 0.00
X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and
it is advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between
X-ray request and the response.
224 Transversal tabletop dead band The dead band is the "the window" around the set point, that once mm 8
reached turns off the movement. The smaller this value is, the more
precise the positioning with relation to the end runs (min, max and
centering) but the risk of movement oscillations increases around the set
point when the stop is requested. A compromise value must be inserted
between these two effects to optimise the movement of the transversal
tabletop.
225 SID dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement
at the min and the max.
226 Compression force dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. kg 0.5
The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the
compression force, set by means of the control panel keys, when applied
to the patient.

SERVICE MANUAL

227 Grid dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid movement at
the min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.
228 Gripping dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 3
The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide
movement only at the maximum opening. This data must be input with
maximum care because too small a value will determine a collision
between the guides and the walls of the Spot Film Device risking a
breakage of the motor protection fuse while too great a value will make
the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult.
229 Width collimator dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to insert in this cell shall be active for the movement of the
base axis of the collimator for all the automatic collimation positions on
cassette sizes, on II sizes and at the min and the max.
230 Collimator height dead band The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the height collimation mm 2
axis.
231 Iris collimator dead band The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the iris collimation mm 2
axis.
232 Width collimator slow down band The slow down band is positioned around the dead band of collimator mm 15
width axis. This data determines the change of movement speed of the
movement in the axis before the dead band is reached. Thanks to this
slowing down (implemented by a hardware circuit) it will be possible to
set very small dead bands (thereby enhancing position precision) thereby
avoiding oscillations caused by speed of high positions. The data to be
inserted in this cell is therefore intimately bound to the data of the dead
band.

SERVICE MANUAL

233 Height collimator slow down band The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). mm 15
234 Iris collimator slow down band The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). mm 15
235 Transversal tabletop average speed Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an mm/s 54
on/off movement with potmeter feedback only for position monitoring,
the logic is not able to correct the speed. It will therefore be possible for
the logic to monitor an excessive position error caused by a mechanical
defect (movement /potmeter coupling etc.). To recognise such an error
however the logic must know the average speed of the tabletop movement
in all its conditions. The average value of this speed must be inserted in
this cell after having calculated it as described in cell 262.
SID average speed (table with SID What is described for cell 235 applies. mm/s 25
1000 ÷ 1500 mm / 39.4" ÷ 59.1")
236
SID average speed (table with SID What is described for cell 235 applies. See also paragraph 16.3. mm/s 32 / 41
1100 ÷ 1800 mm / 43.3" ÷ 70.9")
SID height after tomo (table with SID This value sets the SID position automatically readed when the 100
1000 ÷ 1500 mm / 39.4" ÷ 59.1") Tomography function is completed.
237 cm
SID height after tomo (table with SID If value selected is out of present SID range, the positioning at the 110
1100 ÷ 1800 mm / 43.3" ÷ 70.9") Tomography exit will be done corresponding to the limits.
238 Angio table lift default position If the table is used for stepping angiograph tests, the data inserted in this mm 1100
cell determines the height of the tabletop for m the ground when the
stepping angio mode entrance procedure is finished.
239 II diam percentage per angio step The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected. % 90
However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next, that helps
in the reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage, it is necessary for
the length of the step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. The
length of the step can be reduced in percentage terms through the data
that is placed in this cell.
240 Min height with tilt joystick This datum define the table height increment from the floor in mm 0
comparison with the minimum position, when tilt or centre joystick are
activated. With datum 0 the table height is the same when horizontal
position is reached by acting tilt or lift down joystick.

SERVICE MANUAL

241 Shutters corr. pos. for fluoro This setting is used to correct the shutters position from the width mm 0
reduction collimator when a reduction by joystick is activated. This correction is not
present on:
− I.I. size
− cassettes subdivision.
242 Minimum distance tube shaft – This setting define the correct collimation if a Wall Bucky with Sensing mm 1000
Sensing tray (Wall Bucky option) Tray is present.
Must be stored the minimu distance between tube shaft and film present
into Sensing tray.
Because the beam is centred to Wall Bucky when tube is rotated of 180°,
the minimum distance is when the SID is with max extension.
243 0 = Villa Coll. 1 = Ralco Coll. This depends on the configuration of the table that can make provision 0
2 = Iris Coll. for a collimator with square/rectangular field Villa or Ralco model or
square/rectangular field with iris.
244 0=1 speed 1=2 speed 2=3 speed This setting define the default speed for Tomo modality
st nd rd 0
3=4th speed
Tomo default speed
245 0 = 7° 1 = 20° 2 = 30° 3 = 45° This setting define the default angle for Tomo modality 3
Tomo default angle

SERVICE MANUAL

246 0=disab 1=filters 2=puls 3=zone Dependent on the TV chain installed on the table or at the presence of a 0
4=f.coll collimator with motorised additional filters selection and the
requirements of the operators, it is possible to configure the dedicated
key function and the relative outputs. There are five functions:
- 0 = disabled function
- 1= filter display (CCDx0 – CCDx2 – CCDx4 – CCDx8). Activation of
the three relative outputs.
- 2 = mode display (pulsed – continuous). Activation of the output
corresponding to CCDx0 when “pulsed” is displayed
- 3 = ROI display (large – small). Activation of the output corresponding
to CCDx0 when "large" is displayed.
- 4 = collimator additional filters visualisation (+0 - +1Al - +0.1Cu -
+0.2Cu). Activation of the three relative outputs.
247 0=I - 1=GB - 2=F - 3=E - 4=D - Depending on the country where the system is installed, it is possible to 0
5=RU¤ choose what language the messages will be displayed in. This applies to
all the messages that are displayed during the regular operation of the
equipment. With regard to the display of the service programs (functions
that can be accessed through the dip-switches) there are two languages:
Italian with selection = 0, English for all the other selections.

SERVICE MANUAL
The cells in group 200 after those already listed are used to make the
setting choices and not introduce numerical data like the previous ones.
In these fields a choice is requested between values 0 or 1 to establish
the setting choice.
Do the following to modify the input data:
1. Press the MODE2 key to enable the correction. The display will show
the flashing message CORR.
2. Press key F3. The data present is automatically replaced with the
alternative.
After this operation, the writing CORR disappears and the data is
confirmed in EEprom.

SERVICE MANUAL
Cell Display Function description Default Setting

250 0 = no 1 = yes This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or 0
Collimator hold mode default each time the "automatic collimator" mode is selected, the Hold function
is active by default or whether it must be activated by the operator by
pushing the relative key.
251 0=foot-head 1=head-foot This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions. 0
Cross subdivision sequence
1 2
- 0= 3 4
3 4
- 1= 1 2
252 0 = 3 fields 1 = 4 fields The data depends on the II installed. Typically the 4 field selection is for 0
I.I. fields selection 16” II.
253 0 = no 1 = yes The table version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1"), has the Depending
angulation motor in asymmetric position. Consequently the scan range is by version
reduced on the motor side when tilt angle is included between -5° e -75°,
to avoid the collision between motor and floor.
The table version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9"), has the
angulation motor in centred position, consequently no scan limitation is
required.
This cell set depends by the table version and define the scan range
limitation depending by the tilt angle.

SERVICE MANUAL

254 0 = no 1 = yes The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety device to 0
Anti entrapment device prevent the entrapment of parts between internal tabletop profiles and
SFD rear side and between column and SFD lateral side. If this circuit is
installed it will be necessary to activate the relative input software control
using this setting. The C-CSA-US versions are always equipped with this
circuit.
255 0=pres. 1=abs. As an option, the table can be fitted with an II lift device to bring it 1
I.I. lift towards the tabletop in digital fluoroscopic mode (dependent on the
setting of cell 256). When this option is present the value must be 0.
All Digital version does not carry I.I. lift.
256 0 = no 1 = yes If the I.I. lift option is present (cell 255) the II is always brought towards 0
I.I. lift go up in fluoro the table when the digital mode is selected. The value to be keyed in this
cell determines whether the approach also occurs when the fluoro is
requested. The mode enhances the quality of the image but delays the
fluoro-exposure passage time.
257 0 = cm 1 = inch The selection depends on the cassettes that are available. 0
Cassette type

SERVICE MANUAL

258 0 = right side 1 = left side The function of this cell depends by the set of cell 253. 0
Table vertical position - Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59.1") (cell 253 = 0)
Depending on the room where the table is installed, the "vertical
position" can be on the right or left side. The angulation motor will be
mounted on the left side when the vertical position will be on the right
side and vice-versa. Selecting 0 (vertical on the right – Trendelenbourg
on the left) the display will show positive angles when tilting to the
right. The scanning will have a run limited to 350 mm (13.8") from
the centre instead of 800 mm (31.5") when the tilting angle is between
–5° and –80°.
Selecting 1, the above will be reversed.
The setting of this parameter must always be consistent with the
angulation motor. If this setting is not consistent the motor will hit
the floor during tilting with the scanning close to its range limit.
- Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") (cell 253 = 1)
For this table version, the function of this cell is relevant only to the
tilt angle visualization (+ / -). No scan limitation is applied.
259 0=off-off 1=off-on Dependent on the type of TV chain installed, it might be necessary to 1
Horizontal image scan reverse activate the horizontal image scan reverse output by default. Selection 0
determines that when the table is turned on both the dedicated key led
and the relative output are Off. By pressing the key the led is turned on
and the output is activated.
When the table is on, selection 1 determines the automatic activation of
the output with the led of the relative key off. When the horizontal image
scan reverse key is pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.
260 0=off-off 1=off-on What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image 0
Vertical image scan reverse scan reverse function.

SERVICE MANUAL

261 0=enable 1=disable It disables the Spot Film Device controls. The initialisation functions and 0
Spot Film Device disabling all the relative modes are no longer performed. This override is present
To be set at 1 in "All Digital" version when the table is in the “All digital” version.
This can be activated if the Spot Film Device breaks down to exclude
alarms and any disabling.
262 0=normal 1=service In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated. 0
Technical service function The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE
FUNCTION ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be
used for service and control operations.
- Display of the instant speeds
By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is
visualised thanks to the potmeter feedback. The speed in all load
conditions and position of the equipment must be checked, the
various values noted and the average obtained. The values that can
be obtained in this way must be inserted in cell 235 for transversal
tabletop and 236 for the SID. The measurement of the speeds only
must to be done if the movement potmeters have already been
adjusted. Otherwise the value shown is not real.
- Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the Spot Film Device
shutters
The collimator and the Spot Film Device shutters do not perform the
limitation on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and
measurements to be made on the Spot Film Device or the exposed
films.
263 0=high –high 1=high -low It reverses the image on the monitor high-low when the function ‘monitor 0
orienting’ is selected.
264 0=right-right 1=right left It reverses the image on the monitor right-left high-low when the function 0
‘monitor orienting’ is selected.
265 0=cm–kg 1=inch-lbs Sets the SID, layer and compression force data visualization in cm-kg or 0
Parameters visualization inch-lbs.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data

data
This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors
controlled using the PDI (proportional, derived, integral) method.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment.
Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to
understand its meaning, its function and the possible consequences,
thoroughly.
The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the
function of the various cells present for each of the motors controlled
using this system.
11.2.1 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control
To move an axis, the control software must know:

• the departure point of the movement
• the point of arrival.
The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in
which the axis is.
The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is
selected.
To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a
trajectory.
This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells
containing the speed and acceleration values.
To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to
carry out two separate functions:
• the generation of the trajectory
• following the trajectory.
• Generation of the trajectory

The software constructs a variable that represents the point where
the movement should be moment by moment.
This variable is called the theoretical trajectory.
Having the departure point as the origin, the generation of the
theoretical trajectory consists of:
– a ramp, i.e. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly
– a stretch of constant speed
– a deceleration ramp with acceleration equal to the acceleration
ramp but with a negative sign.
The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the
theoretical trajectory are those inserted in the relative cells.

SERVICE MANUAL
• Following the trajectory

The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that
generates the real trajectory.
This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref),
sent to the activation that controls the axis motor.
This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the
theoretical trajectory as closely as possible.
This variable is the sum of three components:
– Proportional
The proportional part is product of the multiplication:
"instantaneous error" X "proportional gain"
where:
– the instantaneous error is given by the difference between
the real position (monitored by the feed back of the potmeter
or encoder) and that theoretical (calculated by the generation
of the trajectory)
– the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
– Integral
The integral part is product of the multiplication:
"sum of the errors" X "integral gain"
where:
– the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted
every millisecond that calculates the positioning error
between the real trajectory and the theoretical one.
The error can take a negative and positive value according to
whether the real trajectory is before or after the theoretical
one.
The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic, that is
to say, it will take the error's negative or positive sign into
account.
The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is
accumulated during the accomplishment of the whole
trajectory.
– the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.

SERVICE MANUAL
– Derivative
The derivative part is the product of the multiplication:
"error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain"
where:
– the error difference between samplings, is calculated on
the basis of an interval time that must be set in the dedicated
cell.
This interval expressed in msec. is called "derivative sampling
period".
The position error, i.e. the difference between the real and the
theoretical trajectories, is calculated at each sampling.
The difference between the error detected in a sampling and
the error detected in the next sampling shows the extent to
which the actual trajectory has changed its position with
respect to the theoretical one.
– the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
So far the following fields have been analysed:

• Proportional gain
• Integral gain
• Period of derivative sampling
• Derivative gain
Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the
control of a PDI axis.
• Integration limit
This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors
can assume.
If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell, it will be
limited in accordance with the limit set.
If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed.
This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the
sum assumes values that are considerable.
• Motor STOP error

When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position
of a movement reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell,
the movement will be stopped.

SERVICE MANUAL
• Delay motor turning off

This delay is the time after which, at the end of the run, the motor is
turned off.
This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as
opposed to a theoretical one.
This allows the integral action to complete its function.
By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped.
• Braking time
This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the
acceleration ramp. The time inserted into these cells is equal to the
time the motion employs to pass from the actual speed to 0 in a
linear way. This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect
to the theoretical one. In this case, the integral position recovery
actions are not carried out and the motor turning off delay does not
have effect. This braking modality is used for the following
movements: main beam, middle beam, scan and angulation.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.2.2 Motors check data function
The following tables, divided by motor, contain the data relative to the
various PDI-controlled motors.
Angulation movement
Cell Function Default Set

301 Period derivative sampl. 0.001
302 Proportional gain 200
303 Integral gain 0
304 Derivative gain 200
305 Integration limit (°) 20
306 1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo speed 11.5
307 2nd (°/sec) tomo speed 15.0
308 3rd (°/sec) tomo speed 19.0
309 4th (°/sec) tomo speed 23.0
310 1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo acceleration 29.0
311 2nd (°/sec) tomo acceleration 33.0
312 3rd (°/sec) tomo acceleration 42.0
313 4th (°/sec) tomo acceleration 60.0
314 Error stop motor (°) 5
315 Braking time (sec) 0.3
Scan movement

319 Integral gain 0
321 Integration limit (mm) 20
322 Joystick initial speed (mm/sec) 5
323 Joystick final speed (mm/sec) 150
324 Angio step speed (mm/sec) 300
325 Angio return speed (mm/sec) 300
326 Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2) 250
327 Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2) 300
328 Joystick speed increment (mm/sec2) 30
329 Error stop motor (mm) 100

SERVICE MANUAL
Main beam and middle beam movement (tilting and lift)

336 Proportional gain (*)
337 Integral gain (*)
338 Derivative gain (*)
339 Integration limit 10
340 Low tilting speed (°/sec) (*)
341 High tilting speed (°/sec) 6.0
342 Lift manual speed (mm/sec) 25
343 Slow tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) (*)
344 High tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) 6.0
345 Lift acceleration (mm/sec2) 70
(*) The data inserted into the cells can be with different values in function of the mechanical
characteristics of the unit. As default data can be set 3 different groups:
Cell Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

336 600 500 400
337 10 7 5
338 400 350 300
340 4.5 4.2 4.0
343 4.0 3.8 3.5
Shutters movement

355 Integral gain 50
357 Integration limit (mm) 50.0
358 Initialisation speed (mm/sec) 100.0
360 Work speed (mm/sec) 300.0
361 Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 100.0
362 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 1200.0
364 Delay turning off motor (sec) 0.50

SERVICE MANUAL
Cassette movement

369 Integration limit (mm) 50.0
370 Access speed (until cassette size photosens.) 600.0
(mm/sec)
371 IN-OUT speed (mm/sec) 400.0
373 Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 300.0
374 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 8000
Cross subdivision movement

393 Integration limit 10.0
395 Initialisation speed (mm/sec) 30.0
397 Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 12.0
398 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 2000.0
399 Error stop motor (mm) 35.0

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs
This group contains data that have various functions.

The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided
by groups.
11.3.1 Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter

feedback
As explained in the chapter about potmeters adjustment, the limit to

reach for the calibration is shown on the display.
This limit is set in this block of data.
To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement
run range.
This will entail:

• the variation of the equipment specification
• the adjustment of the potmeter minimum and maximum calibration
• the adjustment of the emergency switches position.
Moreover, it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can

sustain such variation.
The software will divide the new run range by the number of potmeter's
points that are going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum
value of the new run.
WARNING:
Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative
characteristic of the equipment.

SERVICE MANUAL
Cell View Function description Unit Default Setting

401 Angulation: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for angulation movement ° -40.0
402 Angulation: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for angulation movement ° 40.0
403 Scan: minimum position Software minimum scan position for angulation movement mm -800
404 Scan: maximum position Software maximum scan position for angulation movement mm 800
405 Main beam: minimum position Software minimum main beam position for angulation movement mm 135
407 Middle beam: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for middle beam movement mm 135
409 Maximum Trendelembourg position The main beam and middle beam potmeters adjustment determines the ° -88
minimum Trendelembourg position equal to –90°. It might be necessary
to modify such limit to increase the comfort for the patient or to limit the
tilting range. Data selectable is between –20° and –90°; if data sets is
between –87° and –90°, the display will shows, when end limit is reached,
alwais –90°. For all the others selections, due to the stop dead band, the
value displayed at the end limit could be different then the stored one.
410 Maximum vertical position It holds the same as for cell 409 with the difference that this value has an ° 88
influence on the vertical position with positive tilting angles.
411 Transv. tabletop: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for tabletop movement mm -160
412 Transv. tabletop: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for tabletop movement mm 160
Software minimum end of run position for SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm 1016
(39.4" ÷ 59.1") movement
413 Tube shaft - film dist.: minimum pos. mm
Software minimum end of run position for SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm 1106
(43.3" ÷ 70.9") movement
Software maximum end of run position for SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm 1516
(39.4" ÷ 59.1") movement
414 Tube shaft - film dist.: max position mm
Software maximum end of run position for SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm 1806
(43.3" ÷ 70.9") movement

SERVICE MANUAL

415 Minimum main beam forced setting In this cell is it is possible to force-set the minimum value of the main (XXX)
beam movement potmeter. This avoids removing the I.I. to perform the
calibration. To correctly perform this calibration procedure, it will be
necessary to calculate the data to input by checking the difference
between the previously stored minimum and maximum values and the
value corresponding to the maximum of the new calibration. The same
previous difference between the two values shall be applied.
Example: previous Mx = 3600 min = 500 difference = 3100
New max value = 3450 new val to input = 350 obtained applying the
3100 difference to the new max value.
416 Maximum main beam forced setting In this cell is it is possible to set manually the maximum value of the (XXX)
main beam movement potmeter, in the case that it is not possible to
reach the normal maximum position due to limitations of the room.
Calibration is similar to what described in cell 415.
417 Minimum middle beam forced setting It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 415) (XXX)
418 Maximum middle beam forced It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 416) (XXX)
setting
419 Width cassette Wall Bucky: min Sensing tray width cassette locking jaws minimum position. mm 140
position
420 Width cassette Wall Bucky: max Sensing tray width cassette locking jaws max position. mm 465
position
421 Height cassette Wall Bucky: min Sensing tray height cassette locking jaws minimum position. mm 140
position
422 Height cassette Wall Bucky: max Sensing tray height cassette locking jaws max position. mm 465
position
423 Compression force: minimum Software minimum end of run position for compression force kg 01.5
424 Compression force: maximum Software maximum end of run position for compression force kg 15.5
425 Grid: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement mm 000
426 Grid: maximum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement mm 510

SERVICE MANUAL

427 Gripping: minimum size Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement mm 146
428 Gripping: maximum size Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement mm 463
429 Cross subdivision: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement mm -65.0
430 Cross subdivision: maximum Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement mm 65.0
position
431 Shutters: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement mm 0.0
432 Shutters: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement mm 495.0

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.2 Equipment mechanical dimensions
This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of

this equipment.
The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the
various functions' management algorithms (anti-collision, tomography,
lifting and tilting functions, etc.).
WARNING:
These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should
never be modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment
functioning.

SERVICE MANUAL

Dist. tube shaft-angulation shaft mm 1016
(SID=1000) It refers to the distance between the mount shaft of the right tube and
433 the rotation pin of the column. This data must be input with the SID on
Dist. tube shaft-angulation shaft the minimum. It is used to calculate the collision. mm 1106
(SID=1100)
434 Distance vert. main beam shaft – I.I. It is the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin mm 83
sensor and the input I.I. sensor. The value is used to calculate the collision.
435 Distance main beam shaft - main It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam mm 500
beam left side distance left limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.
436 Distance main beam shaft - main It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam mm 1920
beam right side distance right limit. The value is used to calculate the collision.
437 Dist. vert. main beam shaft - upper It refers to the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing mm 206
main beam pin and the main beam upper limit.
Distance curved tabletop – film It is the distance between the tabletop and the film. The data is used to mm 64
438
Distance flat tabletop – film calculate the layer in the tomo modality. mm 82
439 Distance main beam shaft - It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the column mm 64
angulation shaft rotation pin. The value is used to calculate the collision.
441 Dist. I.I.-film (lift.up) This value is used only in the presence of the I.I. lift and it is the distance mm -19
between the film and the I.I. sensor when the lift is in the upper position. (see
The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan NOTE)
run for inclined projections and for the tomography.
442 Dist. I.I.-film (fixed or lift.down) This value is used both in the presence of the I.I. lift and for fixed I.I. mm 18
equipment and it represents the distance between the film and the I.I. (see
sensor. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the NOTE)
scan run for inclined projections and tomography.
443 Distance film - shutters It is the distance between the film and the shutters inside the Spot Film mm 12
Device. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.
NOTE: These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.I.. The correct value will ensure the
correspondence between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections.

SERVICE MANUAL

444 Distance park - cass. size photosens. The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and mm 472
the cassette size photosensor. It is used to correctly position the cassette
in the parking position.
445 Distance vert. middle beam shaft - It is the distance on the vertical axis between the middle beam mount mm 605
floor shaft and the floor. The value is used to calculate the collision.
446 Distance between the middle beam It is the distance between the base-middle beam and main beam-middle mm 1420
shafts beam mount shafts.
The value is used to calculate the collision.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.3 Data relative to single fault potmeter controls
This block of data is used to check the potmeters and the functions
linked to single faults.
A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.

SERVICE MANUAL

447 Max error for transversal tabletop The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal mm 200
tabletop movement (see paragraph 11.1.1). As the real speed will never be
identical to the stored speed, during the movement, an error will indicate
the discrepancy between the real and the theoretical position. This error
will be reset once the movement is stopped. If the error takes on a value
equal to the one stored in this cell, alarm 218 is issued.
448 Max error for SID It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement. mm 200
With respect to the SID movement, the average speed is stored in cell 236
and in case the error value is reached, alarm 220 will be displayed.
449 Max error for stopped potmeters The processor checks that the movements' potmeters do not undergo n/4096 300
variations if the same movements are not active. This is done in order to
guarantee the Single Fault safety.
The number to store in this cell must take into account possible
movements caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement
arrest.
The measurement unit is expressed in "potmeter points", in other words,
a value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion.
The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request
prior to the processor displaying the alarm. For potentially "dangerous"
movements potmeters, a cell is available for each movement (see following
cells).
In this cell the collimator, Spot Film Device and compressor movements
potmeters are checked.

SERVICE MANUAL

450 Extra-run max pot. out of SW range This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potmeter can carry out n/4096 50
in proximity of the software range without generating an alarm.
This extra run can be caused, for instance, by dead bands.
If the potmeter exceeds, during the extra run, the value set in this cell, an
alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potmeter
to the limits.
All this permits to detect if the potmeter circuit is interrupted when
powering on.
451 Max time of joyst. not corresp. - S.F. It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the sec 5.00
activation and single faults circuits.
The time value set in this cell, with measuring unit expressed in sec., is
equal to the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or
232) in case there is no correspondence between the activation and single
fault circuits.
452 Max error for stopped angulation pot. It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. The ° 1.0
value is expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary
movement allowed without generating an alarm.
453 Max error for stopped scan pot. See cell 452 applied to the scan movement. mm 15
454 Max error for stopped main beam See cell 452 applied to the main beam movement. mm 15
pot.
455 Max error for stopped middle beam See cell 452 applied to the middle beam movement. mm 15
pot.
456 Max error for stopped transversal See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement. mm 15
tabletop pot.
457 Max error for pot. SID stopped See cell 452 applied to the SID movement. mm 15

SERVICE MANUAL

458 Opening jaws movement duty cycle To reduced the opening jaws speed a pulsed control has been introduced. % 50
The ON time is fixed at 5 ms, the OFF time between two puses is
adjustable in this cell.
The set is in % and values are present in the following table:
Set % OFF time (ms)
40 ÷ 44 6
45 ÷ 55 5
56 ÷ 65 4
66 ÷ 75 3
76 ÷ 85 2
86 ÷ 95 1
96 ÷ 100 0
459 Cross subdivision displacement The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the mm -60.0
(head side) cross subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with
respect to the central position.
460 Cross subdivision displacement (feet It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet mm 60.0
side) side.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.4 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run
This block contains the runs carried out by the Spot Film Device cassette
and shutters to perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the
relative limitation.
In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not
perfect, it is possible to modify these values, by following closely the
instructions reported in the dedicated chapter.
NOTE:
The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the
measure in the relative cell because of the mechanical inertia of the
system.
In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an
increment and decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of
the correction.
For rapid consultation and interpretation, the runs and the relative cells
are summed up in tables where the first number indicates the cell
number and the second, in brackets, the stored data in mm.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run
The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side, when

the same is in the parking position, with respect to centre of the Spot
Film Device. Such distance is divided into 2 parts:
• the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the
Spot Film Device (227 mm / 8.9")
• the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of
the Spot Film Device (484 mm / 19.0")
The 484 mm (19.0") figure is such as the distance of the photosensor
from the bottom of the Spot Film Device (cell 444) is 472 mm (18.6") but
the cassette parking position is set by the SW at:
• 5 mm (0.2") from the bottom at the end of cassette insertion
• 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom when caming back from a preparation
or test run
NOTE:
Distances given in the tables an stored in the cells are referred to a
parking position of the cassette at 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom of the
Spot Film Device. The correction, when the parking position is at 5 mm
(0.2") from the bottom, is carried out automatically by the software which
increases the distances in the table of 15 mm (0.6").
Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell
219) to compensate the differences due to manufacturing or operating
characteristics. This offset will permit to modify all runs of all
subdivisions of the stored quantity.
The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows:
• Full size
C = (cassette width / 2) – 711
where 711 = 227 + 484
• Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 4)
• Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 3)
• Subdivision 4 in line
C = full size run +/- (3/8 film) and (1/8 film)

SERVICE MANUAL
Table cassette run for cassettes in cm
13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35
461 462 463 466 466 469 472 478 463 512 531 532 518 521 478 500 484 490 500 506 512
PAN
(600.8) (576.0) (576.0) (547.0) (547.0) (547.0) (516.5) (516.5) (575.0) (450.7) (590.5) (466.5) (565.0) (467.0) (516.5) (489.3) (517.0) (467.0) (489.0) (489.3) (451.3)
464 467 467 470 473 479 513 533 519 522 479 501 485 491 501 507 513
(531.0) (486.5) (486.5) (490.0) (442.0) (441.5) (343.5) (367.0) (517.5) (367.0) (441.5) (400.0) (442.5) (367.5) (400.0) (400.0) (342.5)
SUBDIV. 2 L
465 468 468 471 474 480 514 534 520 523 480 502 486 492 502 508 514
(620.0) (606.0) (606.0) (607.5) (592.0) (591.5) (557.5) (567.0) (617.5) (567.0) (591.5) (577.0) (592.0) (565.5) (577.0) (577.0) (557.0)
475 481 515 535 524 481 503 487 493 503 509 515
(415.0) (416.5) (307.7) (335.0) (335.0) (416.5) (370.5) (417.7) (334.3) (370.5) (370.5) (308.0)
476 482 516 536 525 482 504 488 494 504 510 516
SUBDIV. 3 L
(516.0) (516.5) (450.5) (466.5) (466.5) (516.5) (487.5) (517.0) (467.0) (487.5) (487.5) (451.5)
477 483 517 537 526 483 505 489 495 505 511 517
(616.0) (616.3) (592.0) (599.0) (599.0) (616.3) (606.3) (615.5) (599.0) (606.3) (606.3) (593.8)
538 527 496 665

(317.0) (317.0) (316.6) (287.8)
539 528 497 666

(417.3) (417.0) (417.3) (395.2)
SUBDIV. 4 L
540 529 498 667
(516.0) (516.0) (515.0) (502.8)
541 530 499 668

(614.5) (614.5) (617.2) (610.2)
464 467 473

(530.0) (486.5) (442.0)
465 468 474

(622.0) (606.0) (592.0)
SUBDIV. 4 L
464 467 473
(530.0) (486.5) (442.0)
465 468 474
(620.0) (606.0) (592.0)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
(616.0)
SUBDIV. 6 L
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
(616.0)

SERVICE MANUAL
Table cassette run for cassettes in inches
5x7 7x5 8x10 10x8 9.5x9.5 10x12 12x10 7x17 17x7 11x14 14x11 14x14 14x17 17x14
571 572 573 576 588 579 582 628 629 594 600 610 616 622
FULL SIZE
(602.0) (577.0) (563.5) (540.8) (546.0) (538.8) (514.0) (577.0) (449.0) (524.5) (486.0) (488.0) (488.0) (449.5)
574 577 589 580 583 630 595 601 611 617 623
(513.6) (476.8) (485.5) (576.7) (438.3) (342.0) (456.3) (397.5) (399.2) (399.3) (341.5)
SUBDIV. 2 L
575 578 590 581 584 631 596 602 612 618 624
(613.0) (601.5) (606.0) (601.0) (589.0) (556.0) (596.3) (575.5) (578.0) (578.0) (557.4)
591 585 632 597 603 613 619 625

(466.5) (414.5) (306.4) (432.0) (371.0) (369.5) (369.5) (306.4)
592 586 633 598 604 614 620 626

SUBDIV. 3 L
(546.6) (514.5) (449.5) (524.5) (486.0) (488.0) (488.0) (449.4)
593 587 634 599 605 615 621 627

(626.0) (613.5) (591.5) (617.0) (603.5) (606.0) (606.0) (592.4)
635 606
(288.0) (353.0)
636 607
(396.0) (440.5)
SUBDIV. 4 L
637 608
(503.3) (529.5)
638 609
(609.5) (618.3)
574 583
(512.0) (436.3)
575 584
(613.0) (587.0)
SUBDIV. 4 L
574 583
(511.0) (435.0)
575 584
(612.0) (587.3)
585
(412.5)
586
(512.5)
587
SUBDIV. 6 L
(611.5)
585
(411.2)
586
(510.7)

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run
The calculation is based on the typical measures of the Spot Film Device
reported below:
• distance film-upper shutter
• distance film-lower shutter
• mean distance film-shutters
• minimum source to film distance
• maximum source to film distance.
The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the
calibration of the shutters minimum potmeter, i.e. when the shutters are
wide open.
As to line subdivisions, this position is equal to a 475 mm opening,
therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to
move of 475/2 mm.
As to cross subdivisions, the window opening start will require a run
equal to (475/2)+180=417.5 mm., where 180 mm is the width of the
small shutter.
Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions, the
shutters will have to move of 417.5 mm.
In the calculation of the formats to limit, the values KG (radiography
correction), calculated with min SID, will be used.
This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms
with min SID and a thicker line with higher SIDs.
Should a KG be used, calculated with SID greater than the min, the
obtained separation lines would be too thin or radiograms would overlap
in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for the KG calculation.
• Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions

correction (KG)
KG = distance source-shutters / source to film distance
• Calculation shutters opening in Full size
Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG
where:
2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays
cover the film completely
• Calculation of the opening for Subdivision
Format subdivision = ([(Film - (2 * N.div)] / N.div) * KG
• Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line
Run = (426 / 2) - (Fsubdiv / 2)
• Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions
Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2)

SERVICE MANUAL
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.
DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
13 15 18 20 24 30 35 40 43
FULL 542 565 543 563 546 548 557 553 560
SIZE (131.2) (153.0) (183.5) (200.0) (240.0) (301.0) (353.8) (401.0) (431.0)
SUBDIV. 544 564 547 549 558 554 561

2L (87.0) (96.0) (117.0) (148.5) (172.5) (194.2) (210.0)
SUBDIV. 551 559 555 562

3L (99.0) (114.8) (127.8) (139.0)
SUBDIV. 556 669

4L (96.1) (103.5)
SUBDIV. 545 566 550

4L (86.0) (118.0) (147.5)
SUBDIV. 552
6L (97.0)
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions inches
DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH
5 7 8 9.5 10 11 12 14 17
FULL 639 660 640 650 643 653 645 656 661
SIZE (132.2) (182.4) (205.0) (243.0) (256.0) (280.0) (308.0) (360.0) (431.0)
SUBDIV. 641 651 644 654 646 657 662

2L (98.0) (115.5) (124.2) (136.2) (149.0) (176.8) (210.0)
SUBDIV. 652 655 648 658 663

3L (78.0) (89.4) (99.3) (115.0) (139.0)
SUBDIV. 659 664

4L (85.6) (103.5)
SUBDIV. 642 647

4L (100.0) (149.0)
SUBDIV. 649
6L (100.0)

SERVICE MANUAL
11.3.5 Safety aspects for PDI-

PDI-controlled movements
In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors'
activations differs from the feedback speed supplied by the potmeters or
by the encoders, the system must be able to recognise this effect and
therefore bring the equipment to a halt.
This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear
slippage at the potmeter.
For each of the PDI-controlled movements, 2 values determine the
variance amount between PDI and speed, and the time beyond which this
variance triggers an alarm:
• Variance time
It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the
value of the PDI value determined by friction or typical momentum of
inertia at the start.
In case a real problem occurs, the larger is this time, the longer will
be the movement before an alarm is issued.
• K factor
This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value.
The software compares the value of the speed with the PDI/k value.
Being k the denominator of the fraction, the greater will be k, the
smaller will be the result of the fraction.
As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed, the smaller is the PDI/k
value the more a mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted
without issuing any alarm.
By and large, the greater are the time values and k, which are set for
each movement, the more the movement will accept "hardenings",
allowing a non-controlled wide movement before issuing an alarm.
Angulation
Angulation movement
Cell Function Unit Default Setting
671 PID subdivision factor 8000

672 Diagnosis delay sec 1.0
Scan movement


SERVICE MANUAL
Tilting-
Tilting-lifting movement
movement

Shutters movement

Cassette feeding movement

Cross subdivision movement


SERVICE MANUAL
11.4 Position 701 – EEprom

EEprom copy
This program permits to make a copy from EEprom.

This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the
equipment.
At every start these data are loaded in the RAM.
If for safety reasons, you need to copy these data on a spare backup
EEprom, please follow the procedure below:
1. Power off the equipment and position dip switches 1 and 3 on ON.
2. Power on the equipment.
The following will be displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Press correction, then F3
To access the EEprom copy program, carry out the procedure of access to
the various groups as described above.
3. When the access to the copy program is enabled following the correct
procedures, press button MODE2 as displayed, then F3.
The data copy from EEprom to RAM will start.
The following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Transferring data
After a few seconds, if the process has been completed successfully
and no alarms are issued, the following message is displayed:
701 EEPROM – RAM
copy Transfer completed. Turn off
4. At this point, power off the equipment, replace the EEprom with an
identical component on which you might want to store all functional
data of the equipment.
5. Power the table back on. The following message is displayed:
702 RAM – EEPROM
copy Press correction, then F3
Carry out the same operations as for the EEprom – RAM copy.
The data will be stored on the new EEprom.
The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all
functional data.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm

memory
Cells from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the
RAM.
Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that
might be issued. For a correct interpretation of the alarms memory, it is
imperative that date and time are correct.
Besides, it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom.
Once access to edit position 711 has been achieved (see chapter 11) the
display shows:
711 22 - 10 - 2004
07 : 02 : 44
Scrolling the pages by keys "MODE3" and "TEST" the positions will be
displayed:
712 Year setting 04
713 Month setting 10
714 Day setting 22
715 Hour setting 07
716 Minutes setting 02
717 Seconds setting 44
718 Clock adjustment +0.0
Position 718 permits to adjust the clock in case it runs too fast or too
slow due to Quarz variations.
The last position of this group is the following:

719 F3 = reset
Reset alarm memory
By pressing function key F3, the alarm memory stored in the Flash
eprom will be reset.
This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life
The Apollo table is set to perform cyclic movement tests.

These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct
functioning under stress conditions.
It is possible to perform tests for the Spot Film Device or table
movements.
After performing the access procedure, the following message will be
displayed:
721 SPOT FILM DEVICE test TABLE test
1 2
By keying in the access code relative to this position, it will be possible to
select the type of test to be performed by typing 1 for the Spot Film
Device test or 2 for the table test.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.6.1 Spot Film Device test
The Spot Film Device perform the initialisation procedure after which the
following message is displayed:
Load cassette 30x24
By loading the cassette correctly, the cyclic test begins and the following
message is displayed:
722 Test Spot Film Device life
Num.cycles: 00000000 Num.exp.: 00000000
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are
carried out:
Cassette position Shutters and collimator position
Park 4th field I.I. (cell 217)

Program: 30 Full size Full size 43
Park Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 30/2 30/2
Park Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Park Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/3 30/3
Park 4th field I.I. (cell 217)
Park Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 40/4 (line) 40/4 (line)
Park Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Park Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/4 (cross) 30/4 (cross)
In the Full size modality, the shutters position themselves on size 43

rather than on size 30 to carry out the maximum possible run.
Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in
line for cassette 30 is not available.
Every time the cassette is put in the parking position, the following
outputs are enabled:
• fluoro request
• CCD output in rotation
• I.I. field output in rotation.

SERVICE MANUAL
Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position:

• the prep., digital prep, II step, exposure outputs are enabled
• the grid oscillates for 1 sec.
WARNING:
As outputs for the system accessories get enabled, before starting the
Spot Film Device test, make sure that the accessories linked to the
Apollo table are not power-supplied.
At the end of each program the cassette is ejected, the cassette guides
are open and closed again until they grip the cassette.
At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table), before resuming
with what described up until now, the following occurs:
• the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field
• all outputs are turned on
• all console LEDs flash up
• the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs.
On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette
position itself in the X-ray field, so is the number of cycles every time a
complete cycle is performed.
A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.6.2 Table test
The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the
correct functioning of the various organs.
WARNING:
As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF
circuit, during this test, the supervisor is disabled. Therefore its K3 ready
relay does not close. In order to perform the test, make a jumper on the
connector X47 between pins 6 and 7.
Remove the jumper at the end of the test.
WARNING:
The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case
collisions occur. Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic
movements performed by this program. Particularly during the first
cycle, stay close to the emergency red button and be ready to activate it if
any risk condition occurs.
The following message is displayed:

723 Table life test
Number cycles: 00000000
Before starting the proper test cycle, the table goes into the default
position with the following settings:
• Minimum SID
• Tabletop in the middle
• 0° angulation
• scan in the middle
• Compressor in parking position
• 0° tilting
• Minimum lift depending on the installed I.I..
Should in this phase a collision condition occur, the cycle is interrupted
and the following message is displayed:
Cycle interrupted due to collision
The equipment needs to be powered off, the life test interrupted and the
table positioned in a way such that no condition of collision occurs when
the default position is in the process of being reached.

SERVICE MANUAL
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are

carried out:
• SID ascent with concurrent compressor descent. When the limit is
reached, the movements invert the direction until they bring
themselves back with minimum SID and compressor in the parking
position
• angulation towards the head, inversion until feet end of run and
return to 0°
• scan movement towards head concurrent with table inward
movement. When the limit is reached, the movements invert their
direction until they reach the scan feet side and external table end of
run. Return of both movements to the centre
• tilting towards Trendelembourg, movement inversion till reaching the
vertical end of run, then return to 0°.
At the end of the tilting movement, the number of cycles increases by one
unit and the cycle picks up again with the SID and compressor
movement.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to
enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numeric keypad.
In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that
the complete excursion of some movement is not possible, the test will
stop the movement in proximity of the collision limit.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.7 Position 731 – Remote service function
Apollo table was designed to be able to transmit data stored in EEprom

and in Flash Eprom to a PC that can be directly connected to the CPU.
This function is still working in the background and not yet available.

SERVICE MANUAL
11.8 Position 751 – Alarms memory
The recorded alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment

history allowing the identification of anomalies or failures.
This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are
temporarily stored in the RAM, every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads"
these data in the Flash Eprom which, in turn, stores them permanently.
The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 messages that are stored in
progressive order with the LIFO system (last in, first out). The messages
with number 1 will therefore be the most recent to be moved to position
2, 3 , 4 etc. from the following ones. Messages 100 is deleted when a new
messages is stored.
The last 20 messages, those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the
long format, i.e. they take up 5 displays (pages) each.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 751: Display alarms data and table positions
Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1
a diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20)
b diagnosis code
c diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
d diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
e tilting angle in degrees
f scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side)
Line 2
g column angle in degrees
h source to film distance in mm
i tabletop position with respect to the centre in mm (inside negative side)
l main beam movement extension tube in mm
m middle beam movement extension tube in mm
a b c d e f
0 0 1 1 2 5 2 2 - 1 1 - 0 2 2 3 : 1 5 r i B ± X X C A r ± X X X
p E N ± X X D F F X X X X B A r ± X X X t r A X X X C u l X X X
g h i l m

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 752: Display Spot Film Device organs and selections
Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range
Line 1
n shutters opening dimension in mm
o gripping opening in mm
p distance grid from minimum SW (parking side) in mm
q cross.div trolley position from centre in mm
r film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm
s film level limitation dimension for width collimator height in cm
Line 2
t film level limitation dimension for iris collimator in cm
u cassette size (width x height)
v selected cassette subdivision program
z number of subdivisions still available
w compressor in field = 1 in park = 0
x I.I. lift position high = 1 low = 0
selected modality 0 = direct 1 = spot film device 2 = digital
y 3 = tomo spot film device 4 = tomo digital 5 = angio
n o p q r s
l i m ± X X X G A N X X X G r i X X X C r o ± X X C B A X X C A l X X
C i r X X C A s X X x X X D i v X X E s p X C o m X i B X F u N z X
t u v z w x y

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 753: Display joystick
Note: The value 0 means that the joystick is idle, value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred
Line 1
Position Joystick function a b c d
j0 Collimator height open height close width open width close
j1 Angulation centering head side feet side reset
j2 Scan – tabletop out in head side feet side
j3 Lift up Down
j4 Tilt.- function vertical Trendelem. centering function
Line 2
Position Joystick function a b c d
j5 source-to-film dist. up down
j6 compr-0-cent.tbltop up down 0 machine centr.tabletop
j7 fluoro request on/off
j8 prep request on/off
j9 X-rays request on/off
j0 a b c d j1 a b c d j2 a b c d j3 a b j4 a b c d
C o l l X X X X p E N X X X X C A B A X X X X A s C X X r i B F X X X X
D F F X X C o m z C X X X X s C o X p r E X r x X
j5 a b j6 a b c d j7 a j8 a j9 a

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 754: Display digital inputs
NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to
inputs from external accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.
Line 1: Groups A – B – C – D – E
Line 2: Groups F – G – H – I
0 Tube at 0° 19 Generator ready 27 Auxiliary fluoro control

1 End of run compressor high 20 X-ray ON 28 Auxiliary preparation control
A 2
11
End of run compressor low
Movement active compressor
B 21
22
Digital workspace
Spot film device workspace
C 29
30
R control (II step auxiliary)
main beam/angulation inverter started
18 Single Fault series input 23 Shelf safety 31 middle beam/scan inverter started
33 Photosensor access cassette 42 Button double control centering tilt. 47 Button double control angulation head side
34 Cassette size photosensor 43 Button double control lift up 48 Button double control angulation feet side
D 36
40
Gripping pressure switch
Button double control vertical tilt.
E 44
45
Button double control lift down
Button double control scan head side
F 49
50
Button double control centering angulation
Button double control tabletop inside
41 Button double control Trendel. tilt. 46 Button double control scan feet side 51 Button double control tabletop outside
52 Button double control tabletop center. 62 Dip switch modality 3 selection 55 Button 0 machine
53 Button double control SID up 63 Dip switch modality 4 selection 7 Tube 180°
G 54
60
Button double control SID down
Dip switch modality 1 selection
H 3
4
I.I. lift end of run high
I.I. lift end of run low
i 26 Cassette present into Sensing tray
61 Dip switch modality 2 selection 35 Trapping access
A 0 1 2 11 18 B 19 20 21 22 23 C 27 28 29 30 31 D 33 34 36 40 41 E 42 43 44 45 46
F 47 48 49 50 51 G 52 53 54 60 61 H 62 63 3 4 35 i 55 7 26

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 755: Display digital outputs

NOTE: Motors enabling: R cassette, L cassette, shutters and cross subdivision are =1 when the motor is idle and =0 when is running. For all
other outputs 0 means disabled output, 1 enabled output.
Line 1: Groups L – M – N – P – Q
Line 2: Groups R – S – T – U – V
0 Angulation/scan request 13 Middle beam brake release 20 Compressor motor up request
1 Main beam/middle beam inverter request 14 Angulation brake release 21 Compressor motor down request
L 10
11
SID relay up
SID relay down
M 15
18
Scan brake release
Tabletop motor in request
N 23
24
Width collimator motor open request
Width collimator motor close request
12 Main beam brake release 19 Tabletop motor out request 25 Width collimator motor fast request
26 Height collimator motor open request 31 Iris collimator motor fast request 40 fluoro request
27 Height collimator motor close request 32 Main beam/angulation invert enable forward 41 X-rays request
P 28
29
Height collimator motor fast request
Iris collimator motor open request
Q 33
34
Main beam/angulation invert enable backward
Enabling middle beam/scan inverter forward
R 42
43
Preparation request
Request digital preparation
30 Iris collimator motor request close 35 Enabling middle beam/scan inverter backwards 44 Request II step
45 Tomography speed I 50 45° tomography angle 64 Direction R feeding motor
46 Tomography speed II 60 Grid in field motor request 65 Direction L feeding motor
S 47
48
7° tomography angle
20° tomography angle
T 61
62
Grid in parking pos. motor request
Request gripping opening motor
U 66
67
Direction shutter motor
Direction cross subdivision motor
49 30° tomography angle 63 Request gripping closing motor 68 Enable R feeding motor
69 Enable L feeding motor
70 Enable shutters motor
V 71
16
Enable cross subdivision motor
Request I.I. lift motor high
17 Request I.I. lift motor low
l 0 1 10 11 12 m 13 14 15 18 19 N 20 21 23 24 25 p 26 27 28 29 30 Q 31 32 33 34 35
r 40 41 42 43 44 s 45 46 47 48 49 t 50 60 61 62 63 u 64 65 66 67 68 v 69 70 71 16 17

SERVICE MANUAL
When the diagnosis is moved - as a result of the most recent ones being introduced - to a memory position between 21 and 100,
the view is reduced and occupies one single line.
Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines, only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed.
The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows:
PAGE 800:
800: Display reduced diagnosis
Line 1
a diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers)
b diagnosis code
c diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
d diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
Line 2
e diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers)
f diagnosis code
g diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy)
h diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm)
a b c d
0 2 1 1 2 5 2 2 - 1 1 - 0 2 2 3 : 1 5
0 2 2 0 9 6 2 5 - 1 1 - 0 2 1 0 : 0 7
e f g h

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)
11.9 Position 850 – Table cycles memory
The Apollo table stores the activation times of the various movements
besides the number of exposures and, if present, the number of
movements of the I.I. lift.
This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various
organs with respect to the working time, and permits to evaluate whether
preventative maintenance is necessary.
When technical maintenance entailing the replacement of organs takes
place, each movement activation time can be reset independently of the
other movements.
The cycles and times view is shown on 3 pages. To scroll the views, use
button MODE3 to scroll down and button TEST to scroll up.
Following the 3 cycles and times views, 15 reset pages for each data are
available.
The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried
out. This holds for the Spot Film Device, digital and direct modality.
The 7-digit number of cycles of the I.I. lift increases each time the I.I.
ascends or descends.
The activation of all other movements is displayed as time in minutes
and seconds. The common fraction of the 4-digit view indicates the
minutes, the 2-digit decimal fraction indicates the seconds.
In the same way as for the alarm memorisation, data are stored
temporarily in the RAM and every 10 minutes are permanently stored in
the Flash Eprom.
Following is a representation of the view relative to this group.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 850: Display activation cycles (first page)

a number of exposures (all modalities SFD–DIG–DIR) d activation time middle beam motor movement
b fluoroscopy activation time e activation time main beam motor movement
c number of movements I.I. lift
a b c d e
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0
E x p o s . F l u o r o A s C . i B C u l l A t r A v E
PAGE 851: Display activation cycles (second page)

f activation time scan motor movement i activation time transversal tabletop motor movement
g activation time angulation motor movement l activation time compressor motor movement
h activation time SID motor movement
f g h i l
0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0
C A r r o p E N D . D F F B A r . C o m p r .

SERVICE MANUAL
PAGE 852: Display activation cycles (third page)

m activation time shutters motor movement p activation time cross subdivision motor movement
n activ. time motors R and L belts cassette movement q activation time cassette close motor movement
o activation time grid motor movement
m n o p q
0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0
l i m i t . C A s s . G r i G l . C r o C E G A N A s C .

SERVICE MANUAL
From this point the 15 reset pages are displayed as follows:

00000000 F3 = reset
Resetting xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
where:
00000000 = number of cycles or memorised time
Resetting = description of function to be reset.
By pressing key F3, the data will be reset.

SERVICE MANUAL
Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100)

SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic
12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING

OPERATING LOGIC
The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation
circuits of the table movements, i.e. those functions that may be
dangerous to the patient if they are not under control.
This safety measure is devised in such as way that, if a single fault at a
time occurs (hence the term Single Fault), to the various levels of the
chain the movement consists of, the system can identify the fault and
take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate
halt.
The movements of:

• tilting – lift
• angulation
• scan
• transversal tabletop movement
• source to film distance (SID)
• compressor
which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the above-
described SF safety measures.
All controls relative to the above-listed movements, which are present on

both on the console and on the double control, together with the fluoro
and X-ray preparation movements, which are present on the pedal or on
the button, can be realised with a double microswitch (µS).
The first µS is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible
for the movement request.
The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is connected in
series with all second µS that feature the SF safety function.
The series connection permits to have a single wire that is sent to an
input that reaches both the main processor and the supervisor.
The control logic bases the SF check on the correspondence of the SF

circuit and of the movements request.
Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of
the movement (SF circuit open, movements request circuit close).
Moreover, thanks to the feedback of the potmeters of each "movement
group", the main processor is able to recognise if a movement is active
without an active request.
To complete the redundant checks on all levels, a second processor called
supervisor is connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed
movements outputs) to the main processor.

SERVICE MANUAL
Single Fault operating logic
This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor

that will have to manage in a consistent way the serial and parallel data
to the output ports.
2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a
processor and the contact are connected in series.
The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that
supplies the power circuits. If any anomaly is detected, one or both
processors stop exciting the relative relay and interrupt immediately any
movement.
Thanks to such HW and SW logic, each organ responsible for the
movement is monitored and if a failure on the movement activation
circuit occurs, the system can detect and interrupt the movement itself
generating an alarm.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13 FUNCTIONALITY
13.1 Collision
When activating one or more movements, one part of the equipment

might reach the safety limit beyond which a collision with the walls, the
ceiling or the floor might occur.
This limit, set by means of group 200 cells, represents an imaginary
insuperable software barrier beyond which it is impossible to move for
any part of the equipment.
When a part of the equipment reaches this limit, the movement that
determined this situation is stopped.
The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a
command that informs the operator that some movements might be
disabled.
The parts of the table that can collide with walls, floor or ceiling are: the
image intensifier, the extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the
extremities of the tabletop), the compressor and the tube-collimator
group.
When the extremities of the main beam, the intensifier or the compressor
reach such limit, movements commands that can bring the element into
collision are suddenly inhibited. On the other hand, movements
commands that can bring the components away from the collision point
are free.
When the intensifier reaches the limit towards the floor because of the
scan movement, the message SCAN LIMIT is displayed.
Should this limit be reached because of the tilting movement instead,
depending on where the movement comes from and is directed to
(example from –90° towards 0° or from 0° towards +90° etc.), the piloting
algorithm of the main beam and middle beam motors is adjusted by
activating an anti-collision function.
This will allow the intensifier to move out of the limit area without
stopping the movement and with no need for the operator to adjust the
patient centering position.
As for the tube-collimator group, because of the particular Apollo table
lift-tilting function, all those movements that apparently may not be
dangerous but, if they continued, could increase the risk of collision are
inhibited.
Following are 4 tables with the representations of the various conditions.
Each representation is a "LIMIT REACHED" condition for the tube-
collimator group with the right wall, the left wall, the ceiling and the
floor.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table
(RIB) or the column (ANG) could find themselves when the limit is
reached.
"0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal
position, "+" indicates that the table is inclined towards the vertical
position and "-" that the table is inclined towards the Trendelemburg.
"0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular
to the table, "+" indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet
and "-" that it is inclined towards the head.
The 5 following couples of columns report the movements and relative
directions responsible for the direct or indirect movement of the tube-
collimator group.
The YES cells indicate that the movement is free, while the NO cells
indicated that the movement is inhibited.
The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that
particular combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.
Table showi
showing
ng movements allowed for Tube – Right Wall
collision
ANGLES SCAN ANGULATION TILTING LIFT SID

TILT ANG HEAD FEET HEAD FEET TREND VERT UP DOWN UP DOWN
0 0
0 + YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO YES
0 -
+ 0 YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES NO YES
- 0
+ + YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES
+ - YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES NO YES
- + YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO YES
- -

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Left Wall

collision

0 0
0 +
0 - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO YES
+ 0
- 0 NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
+ +
+ - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO YES
- + NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
- - NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Ceiling

collision

0 0 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO YES
0 + NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES NO YES
0 - NO NO YES NO NO NO NO YES NO YES
+ 0 NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES
- 0 YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO YES
+ + NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES
+ - NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES
- + YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES
- - YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO YES

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Floor collision

0 0
0 +
0 -
+ 0 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES NO YES
- 0 NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO YES
+ + YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES NO YES
+ - YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES NO YES
- + NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO YES
- - NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO YES

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.1.1 Anticollision
Anticollision barrier
When the room where the device is installed has irregularities in its
geometry that make necessary supplemental anticollision measures, the
Apollo table can be protected against the risk of collision with these
geometrical irregularities of the room.
Depending from the specific needs it is possible to implement light
barrier sensors or antenna switches that when activated prevent table
components from hitting obstacles of the room.
Connection of these safety devices must be done so that it sends 0V to
input X0-17 when operating conditions are correct; when the safety
barrier is infringed the input must open
Once the anticollision sensor is activated, the movement in progress is
stopped and a message is displayed:
<< LIMIT BARRIER >>
with an intermittent buzzer sound.
To exit this condition and restore normal operation of the system, it will
be possible to activate only the movement that had generated the "limit
barrier" alarm in the opposite direction.
All other commands (joystick on console and keys on the on-board
keypad) are disabled until the message "limit barrier" is removed.
If the limit barrier is activated in the following conditions:
• switch on of the system
• access to tomography functionality
• access to angiographic functionality
• during execution of a Tomography test
• during execution of a step angiography test
• movement to reach a stored position by means of command "0".
the movement is stopped and the active functionality, if any, is reset.
In this condition no joystick or button of the on board keyboard is active,
then to exit from this "limit barrier" lock it is necessary to proceed with a
"bypass" procedure as outlined here below.
Keeping pressed at the same time keys F4 and F5, positioned in the
lower end of the display, ALL movement commands by joystick or on
board keyboard are enabled, making possible to start any movement.
This "bypass" procedure is always possible when the "limit barrier"
condition has been reached.
WARNING:
This "bypass" procedure can be very dangerous since a wrong command
can cause any part of the table to hit the obstacle in the room. Before
giving any movement command it is necessary to check carefully which
movement will bring the table far away from the obstacle. In any case
always activate the movement with great care in short pulses.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.1.2 Anti entrapment device
The Apollo table can be equipped with an anti-entrapment feature

(standard on C-CSA-US versions) which blocks the angulation movement
an the inner table top side movement should the patient come in contact
with the areas in which the anti-entrapment sensors are located.
In this case the angulation and/or inner table top side movements are
automatically blocked and it is possible to activate the unit only in the
opposite direction of that which caused the entrapment.
The circuit is realised in such a way if the safety membranes are pressed
the movement is blocked as described above, and if the circuit is broken
alarm 82 is generated.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.2 Compressor
When the compressor is not in the parking position (i.e. when the high
end of run microswitch is released), by enabling angulation if column is
in a position between ±15°, tabletop or scan movements, the following
will occur:
• the requested movement is not activated
• the compressor goes up for:
– 0.5 sec for scan or tabletop movement
– 1.0 sec for angulation movement
after complete release of the compression force.
When the time limit is reached, the ascent stops and a confirmation
acoustic signal is issued.
Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired
movement.
The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo table movements of the
"dead man" type, therefore, if during the compressor ascent the joystick
is released, the movement will stop.
By pushing the joystick once again, the ascent is enabled again for a time
depending on the current compression force without taking into account
the previous partial ascent.
Only after completion of the ascent, the requested movement will be free.
It will then be possible to move the patient, scan or column without risk
and, afterwards, compress the patient once again.
NOTE:
It is necessary to drive compressor up to park position to angulated the
column over the ±15° limits.
When the compressor is not in park position and the column externally
to ±15°, by activating the angulation movement, the compressor is taken
back to the parking position.
The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for
240 msecs if the potmeter exceeds the set dead band.
This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the
cone, such as by breathing.
NOTE:
Every time the compressor activates the parking switch, the set value of
the compressor force is forced to 5 kg (11.0 lbs).

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.3 Collimator
The Apollo table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a

square field one with iris.
The software pilots the iris axis if the presence of the collimator with iris
is confirmed through the selection of cell 253.
The collimator operating modes are:
• automatic
• manual.
The automatic mode can in turn be associated to the Hold function.
The selection of the collimator operating mode depends both on the

choice of the operator and on the condition of the "Digital (X0-14)" and "
Spot Film Device (X0-15)" inputs.
The conditions are:
Inputs Manual modality Automatic modality
X0-14 ON (Digital) NOT POSSIBLE ACTIVE

X0-15 ON (Spot Film Device) SELECTABLE SELECTABLE
X0-14 OFF X0-15 OFF (Direct) ACTIVE NOT POSSIBLE
When the automatic function is active or selected, the Hold function can
be activated or excluded by the operator.
• Manual modality
– If no program is selected, when the fluoro control is not active, by
means of the joystick it is possible to collimate a format
comprised between the minimum and maximum size.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
format available is equal to the selected I.I..
– When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the
format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
This condition is valid regardless whether the fluoro control is
activated or not.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except for if a cross
subdivision has been performed

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
– When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison

with the one of the selected I.I., when the fluoro control is not
active, by means of the joystick, it will be possible to position the
axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the
selected format.
Conversely, when the fluoro control is activated, the maximum
possible format is the one of the selected I.I. field.
– The manual function LED on the console is always on regardless
whether the fluoro control is on or off.
– In case the collimation is greater in comparison with the selected
I.I. field, by pressing the fluoro control, the collimation will be
reduced to the I.I. format.
When the fluoro control is released, the shutters go back to the
position in they had before the activation of the fluoro control.
– At any time, the automatic collimator function may be selected.
Both axes will bring themselves on the selected I.I. format
position
– If the equipment is powered off when the collimator is in the
manual mode, when powering back on, the automatic function
will be activated.
– In case an iris collimator is present, the iris limitation control
buttons are not active and the iris will always be circumscribed
at the width and height axes.
• Automatic modality
– If no program is selected, by means of the joystick, it is possible
to collimate a format comprised between the set I.I. format and
the minimum one.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of
the collimator during this limitation.
– When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the
format of the selected I.I., the collimator positions itself on the
division format, which is the largest possible format. It will be
possible then to collimate, by means of the joystick, any format
comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.
The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator
width axis if a further reduction is performed, except the case in
which a cross subdivision has been performed
– When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison
with the one of the selected I.I., by means of the joystick, it will
be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between
the minimum and the selected I.I. field.
– When the preparation control is activated, the collimator always
positions itself on the selected subdivision format
– At any time the manual collimator function may be selected.
– If an iris collimator is present, it is possible to collimate in a
circular way by means of the iris control buttons. In this case the
axes and height will be circumscribed to the iris.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
• Hold automatic modality

The functioning is identical to the automatic modality except for the
case in which during the fluoro a reduction by means of the joystick
of one of both axes is performed.
In this case when preparation is activated the collimator stays in the
position obtained by means of the joystick.
The same holds for the limitations performed by means of the iris.
Both collimators, with or without iris are fitted with a halogen lamp for
the patient centering without fluoro. By pressing the lamp collimator
button when the light is off the light goes on, by pressing the lamp
collimator button when the light is on the light goes off.
The light goes off anyhow after 45 secs. from the switching on.
WARNING:
The switching on and off cycle of the collimator lamp should not exceed 2
consecutive duty cycles followed by 180 secs. of switching off.
This work cycle ensures that the parts that might get into contact with
the patient do not reach high temperatures due to overheating of the
halogen lamp.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.4 Table automatic positioning
The Apollo table is designed in such a way to allow to store 3 operating

conditions.
Buttons MODE1, MODE2 and MODE3 permit to store and retrieve these
conditions, the joystick and the 0 key on the console and on the keypad
on board of the table permit to reach stored positions.
The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and contain default values
when the equipment is shipped from the factory and every time that the
potmeters adjustment subroutine (group 100) is accessed.
Note that if the operator has stored positions different from the default
ones, by performing technical maintenance with access to group 100,
such memorised values will be lost. The same will happen if the EEPROM
is replaced.
When all 3 memories are default ones, the 3 LEDs relative to the MODE
buttons are off.
The default positions are as follows:
• tilting at 0° with lift at minimum depending on the installed I.I.
• scan in the middle
• column at 0°
• SID on minimum
• Tabletop in the centre
• Compressor in parking position
• Slow tilting speed
• tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor.
To modify these stored values, bring the above-listed movements in the
desired positions and choose the 3 selections (tilting speed and
movement orientation) depending on the need.
After setting the above-mentioned values, press for 5 secs. the MODE
button you want to associate with the actual configuration.
At the end of the 5 secs. the following message is displayed:
<< POSITION STORED >>
To recall a condition, press the MODE button which the desired setting is
associated to. When the relative LED lights up, hold the joystick or key 0
pressed until the setting is completed.
The completion of such procedure is confirmed with the following
message
<< POSITION REACHED >>
on the display.
When one or more stored values are present, the last selection (LED
associated to the MODE button on) is maintained both during the
operating mode and at the start.
The joystick and button 0 are not active, therefore the table positioning is
not allowed when the angio step and tomo modalities are active.

SERVICE MANUAL
Functionality
13.5 Automatic collimation on Wall Bucky with Sensing

tray (Option)
This function is allowed if table is equipped with WB (Wall Bucky) kit

(code 7284829000) only.
The Wall Bucky function is active when tube is rotated of 180°,

consequently the relevant switch is activated and when Free mode is
selected (input working place SFD X0-15 and DIGITAL X0-14 enabled). If
a cassette is present into SFD, the Free mode selection cause the
automatic cassette ejection.
When tube positioned at 180° and Free mode selected, the following
message will be displayed:
<< WALL BUCKY MODE >>
On display will be also present:
• cassette located into Sensing tray dimension
• distance between focus and film present into the Sensin tray.
If no cassette is present, the following message is displayed:
<< CASSETTE NOT PRESENT >>
The automatic collimation will be done on film size and it is possibile
encrease the limitation of one or both axis by relevant joistick.
If Hold function is active, an additinal collimation made by joistick will be
maintained, otherwise with prep activated, the collimator will reach the
film size.
At the exposure end, the message:

<< FILM EXPOSED: REMOVE CASSETTE >>
will be displayed.
A new exposure will be possible only after removing the cassette.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14 OPERATING MODE
14.1 Spot Film Device
Input X0-15 is active.

The size of the cassette in the Spot Film Device and the number of
possible exposures are shown on the display once the subdivision
program has been selected.
The collimator can be selected in automatic, automatic+hold, or manual
mode.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device performs all the cassette-carrying scan, vibration
grid and shutter movements.
These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the
collimator.
It is possible to carry out radiography investigations with return of the
cassette to the park at the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro
investigation or in rapid mode, by performing sequential exposures.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.1.1 "Standard radiography" performance block diagram
• Park cassette
• I.I. or div. shutters
→ ←
• I.I. or div. collimator
Reset
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
• Movement towards posit.
exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
•"Prep. request" out ON
↓ ↑
↑ • Reaching NO
final position of: → →
- Cassette Alarm
- Shutters 060
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
NO Alarm
• Input "generat. Ready"
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Grid movement start
• Cell 223 time decrease
↓ ↑
• Cell 223 timeout :
"X-ray request" out ON
↓
↑ • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
ON within 0.36 secs. → 064 →
YES ↓ ↑
Exposure in progress. I step:
• Pedal release with YES Alarm 067
"X-ray presence" input → II step: →
ON Alarm 066
NO ↓ ↑
• "X-ray presence" input YES Alarm
ON after 6.5 secs. → 065 →
NO ↓
YES • I and II step release
← with X-ray end time. ←
("X-ray presence" OFF)
NO ↓

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.1.2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram
• Subdivision and
shutter select. ←
• Park cassette
↓ ↑
I step: Reset
• Movement towards joystick activation
posit. exposure of: alarms
- Cassette
- Shutters ↑
- Collimator
• "Prep. request" out ON • Progr. aborted
• Grid movem. start • Tray expelled
↓
• Reaching final
position of: ↑
- Cassette NO Alarm
- Shutters → 061 →
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator NO Alarm
• Input "generat. Ready" 062
within 3 secs. → →
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON ↑
↓
• "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
YES ↓ ↑
• "X-ray presence" input
(End X-ray) OFF within: NO Alarm
→ 6.5 sec → 065 →
- "X-ray request" out OFF
YES ↓
Program YES ↑
end → → →
NO ↓ ↑
• Pedal release with YES Alarm
program not end → 063 → ↓
NO ↓
↑ • Next Tray ↑
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
YES • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm Tray OUT or
← ON within 3 secs. → 064 → park (sel. esp)

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2 Standard tomographic
The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography

angles (7, 20, 30, 45) each of which can be associated with 2 speeds.
The layer can be set with steps of 1 mm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to
a value of 350 mm (13.8").
The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or
viceversa and the automatic layer increase function can be selected.
This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on
the angle set while respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below:
• 7° increase 30 mm (1.1")
• 20° increase 20 mm (0.8")
• 30° increase 10 mm (0.4")
• 45° increase 5 mm (0.2")
It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential
tomography).
In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography, the
automatic layer increase is always active.
At the end of the ray angle, the operating mode provides for the
immediate departure of the column for the next tomography.
The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice
versa.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2.1 "Standard tomography" block diagram

• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
• Park cassette
→ • I.I. or div. shutters ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
• Movement towards
exposure position of:
Cassette, Shutters, ↑
Collimator
• Grid movement start Reset
joystick
• Column towards load
activation
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
↑ • Reached final position of:
- Cassette NO ↑
Alarm
- Shutters → →
060
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
YES ↓
• Column movement Start
↓ ↑
• Column in Tomo angle
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
YES ↓ ↑
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input YES Alarm
OFF with column still at → 068 →
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓ ↑
• X-ray presence ON for YES
more than 0.7 sec from Alarm
the end of Tomo (X-ray → 069 →
request OFF)
NO ↓
with column centering
← ended
↑ NO ↓
YES Centering joystick
← activation. Column at 0°

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.2.2 "Sequential tomography" block diagram

• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
→ • Cassette park ←
Centering joystick
↓
activation
I step:
• Movement towards position
exposure of:
- Cassette, Shutters,
↑
Collimator
• Grid movement start Reset joystick
• Column towards load activation
• "Prep. request." out ON
↓
↑ • Reaching final position of:
- Cassette, Shutters, NO Alarm ↑
Collimator 060
within 5 secs.
→ →
YES ↓
• Input "generat.Ready" 062
YES ↓
• Column movement start

→
↓ ↑
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
YES ↓ ↑
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input OFF YES Alarm
with column still in → 068 →
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓ ↑
more than 0.7 sec from the Alarm
end of Tomo (X-ray request → 069 →
OFF)
NO ↓
NO • Start for next tomography
← X-ray control release
YES ↓
YES • End of sequence with column
← centering ended
↑ NO ↓

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.3 Direct
Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated.

The display indicates DIR.
The collimator can only be selected in manual mode.
It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro
request output towards the generator is disabled.
It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal
commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device in this phase does not perform the cassette
carrying scan movement, grid vibration and shutters.
The preparation outputs, II step and exposure are sent to the generator
and without conditioning.
Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.4 Digital
This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image

acquisition, storage and processing device.
The Apollo table has been designed and built to be connected to the
digital systems VDR 2000, DIVA and DIVA-D.
Input X0-14 is active.
The display shows the initials DIG.
The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or
automatic+hold.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by
operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device, if fitted, does not perform the cassette and grid
vibration movement in this phase, while the shutters follow possible
reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.4.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • No cass or cass in park ←
Reset
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
YES ↓
↓ ↑
YES ↓
Exposure in progress
DSI Exposure frequency ←
↓
YES • I and II step release ↑
← in any condition
NO ↓

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5 Digital Tomography
The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image

acquisition system (see digital mode).
The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with
the same options of the standard tomographic mode.
The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I.I. of
the film.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5.1 "Digital tomography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
I step: ↑
• Column towards load Reset
• Out "prep. request." ON joystick
activation
↓
YES ↓
• Movement column start
↓ ↑
↓
YES ↓ ↑
more than 0.7 sec from → Alarm →
the end of Tomo (X-ray 069
request OFF)
NO ↓
← with column centering
ended
↑ NO ↓

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.5.2 "Digital tomography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
I step: ↑
• Column towards load Reset
• Out "prep. request." ON joystick
activation
↓
YES ↓
→
• Column movement start
↓ ↑
↓
↑ ↑ • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
YES ↓ ↑
more than 0.7 sec from → Alarm →
the end of Tomo (X-ray 069
request OFF)
NO ↓
NO • Start for next tomography
← X-ray control release
YES ↓
← with column centering
ended
↑ NO ↓

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.6 Angiographic
Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital
acquisition system.
The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the
peripheral artery circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid
administered to the patient.
The mode provides for the movement of the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube
group with "steps" established by the size of the selected I.I. field.
When the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group completes the movement, the
prep.- II step-exposure make it possible to take digital images.

SERVICE MANUAL
Operating mode
14.6.1 "Stepping angio"

angio" block diagram
• Angiografic mode select.

• Digital ON ←
• Scan positioning
• Station choice
↓ ↑
Reset joystick
I station: activation
I step: alarms
• "Digital prep. request"
↑
out ON
• Progr. aborted
YES ↓
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON ↑
↓
• "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
YES ↓ ↑
• Exposure release and
prep. per exposure
interruption
↓
I step: (within 15 sec)
• "Digital prep. request" NO Alarm
out ON → 078 →
• Scan movement start
per step
YES ↓
NO Next station
← • Scan position reached
• Last station
YES ↓
Program
end

SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run
15 EMERGENCY END R
RUN
All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits
established by the potmeters and stored in the EEprom.
All the table movements are equipped with hardware emergency end
runs, in case the software fails to stop for a malfunction, the emergency
microswitch positioned immediately after the end of the run software, is
engaged.
The emergency microswitches are connected in series and, if the circuit
opens, power is cut to the power supply main switch K1L.
All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient,
of the operator and the table if there is a malfunction.
The opening of the main switch K1L also determines the opening of the
"power circuit OK" input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080.
The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified by
the following table:
Switch Organ Side
S32 Main beam-middle beam Main beam-middle beam collision

S44 SID LOW
S45 SID HIGH
S46 Tabletop Inner
S47 Tabletop Outer
S48 Middle beam Minimum
S49 Middle beam Maximum
S50 Angulation Head
S51 Angulation Feet
S52 Scan Feet
S53 Scan Head
S54 Main beam Minimum
S55 Main beam Maximum
After turning off the system, the reason for this situation being created
must be identified.

SERVICE MANUAL
Emergency end run
Once the cause has been removed, do the following to restore operation:
1. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet.
2. Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down. Wait till
the end of the initialisation cycle.
3. Use the joystick which caused the emergency situations, in the
direction opposite that of the emergency.
4. Release button S1.
WARNING:
If button S1 is pressed, the series of emergency microswitches is
overridden, so if the cause of the failure is not removed, there will be the
danger that the movement follows its run without any electrical
protection.

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
16.1 A3 output PCB
The trimmers used for the collimator Axle Adjustment Movements are on
the A3 output PCB.
Here below you will find information about how to operate on them.
16.1.1 Collimator axle speed adjustment
• Trimmer to be adjusted:
R15-R20-R25.
• Function:
– R15: width collimator axle speed adjustment
– R20: height collimator axle speed adjustment
– R25: iris collimator axle speed adjustment
• Procedure of adjustment:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to vary the
speeds of the collimator axle movement motor.
This adjustment varies both the speeds the collimator motors use.
The high speed is the one directly obtained from the relative trimmer
adjustment, and is applied when an axle is at distance from the set
point that is greater than the slowdown band (cells 232, 233, 234).
This speed is always used with activation of the joysticks.
The low speed is applied, by means of a hardware partition
deactivated by a processor command. The low speed is activated
when the axle enters the slowdown zone. LEDs 26, 29 and 32
indicate when the high speed is activated.
The rotation of the trimmer in a clockwise direction increases the
speeds. The trimmers are of the 20 rev. type.
The possibility of monitoring this adjustment is double.
It is in fact possible to verify the adjustment in terms of both
reference voltages at the operating devices and directly on the Power
supply motors.
It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC
for the collimator shutters movement between:
– TP10 (gnd) - TP1: width collimator motor
– TP10 (gnd) - TP4: height collimator motor
and can assume a value between 0 and 8 Vdc that will correspond
proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to
24 Vdc.

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC

for the iris collimator shutters movement between:
– TP10 (gnd) - TP7: iris collimator motor
and can assume a value between 0 and 3.5 Vdc that will correspond
proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to
10 Vdc.
It will be possible to check the voltage at the ends of the motors

thanks to the :
– TP2 - TP3: width collimator motor
– TP5 - TP6: height collimator motor
– TP8 - TP9: iris collimator motor.
The required adjustment is obtained when the voltage at the ends of
the motors the measured voltage is 24 Vdc throughout the range of
movement at high speed.

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16.1.2 Adjustment of collimator axle torque

torque gain (armature
reaction)
• Trimmer to be adjusted:
R38-R48-R58.
• Function:
– R38: width collimator axle torque gain adjustment
– R48: height collimator axle torque gain adjustment
– R58: iris collimator axle torque gain adjustment
• Adjustment procedure:
The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to adjust the
torque gain of the gripper movement motor.
The gain increases when the trimmer is turned in a clockwise
direction. The trimmers are twenty turn types.
A good adjustment of this gain makes it possible to get an even
movement that is free of vibrations, since in points where mechanical
hardening of the movement is possible, this gain provides a higher
torque in order to overcome the hardening.
To obtain the adjustment required do the following for each of the
axles:
1. Turn the trimmer of the axle to be adjusted in a clockwise
direction (+).
2. When the axle begins to wobble, turn the trimmer in an
anticlockwise direction.
3. When the self-oscillation stops, turn the trimmer again by 1 turn
in an anticlockwise direction.

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16.2 Compressor PCB
The activation of the compressor movements, the stop at the

microswitches end run and reaching the set compression forces are
managed by the software and controlled by output PCB A3.
The K14 and K15 relays are responsible for the movement activation.
The control of the motor and the speed change switch S31 are dependent
on PCB A15 (Figure 16-1) that has the function of "managing the power"
of the motor.
There are 3 trimmers on this PCB, each having the function of adjusting
one speed.
The compressor motor in fact is controlled with 3 different speeds i.e. to
ensure that the movement is:
• sufficiently high in the compression and patient release zone
• sufficiently slow in the stretch from the park to the field
• with speed identical to the field entrance speed, when brought from
field to park.
To correctly carry out the adjustment of these 3 speeds the table must be
horizontal and the column taken to 0° degrees.
In this condition the compressor equipment masses act unfavourably,
making the adjustment optimal in any condition.
• Adjustment of compression speed

This adjustment must be carried out first of all because it influences
the other two.
With motor in movement in the up/down zone, a voltage of 32 Vdc
must be measured at the test points TP4 and TP5 to be obtained by
means of the adjustment trimmer R38.
• Adjustment of speed towards the park

When the compressor is piloted towards the parking position, at the
end of the vertical ascent stretch, a mechanical system starts the
cone rotating speed change switch S31 is activated.
This determines the selection of the input speed.
This speed can be adjusted by means of the trimmer R39 and, with
active movement in this zone, a voltage of 11 Vdc must be read on
the test points TP4 and TP5.
• Adjustment of exit speeds from the park

When the compressor is piloted from the parking zone until switch
S31 is active, the input speed, that can be regulated by means of
trimmer R40, is used.
When the movement is active in this stretch, a voltage of 9 Vdc must
be read at test points TP4 and TP5

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
Figure 16-1

SERVICE MANUAL
Hardware adjustment
16.3 SID speed set

(for versions with SID DFF 1100 ÷ 1800 mm /
43.3" ÷ 70.9" only)
The SID motor installed on this version can accept a large voltage range.
Consequently will be possibile to use both: the 28V and 35V connection
of the T4 transformer secondary winding 250VA (see chapter 22 –
Functional drawing – page 1, ref. B8).
The above described set allows to increase the motor speed to reduce the
SID time positioning in case the complete range is used. The
consequence is a small motor noise increase.
Average nominal speed and time to cover the complete range (700 mm /
27.6") are listed in the following table:
T4 connection
Time (sec) Speed (mm/sec)
(VAC)
28 22 32
35 17 41

SERVICE MANUAL
Three-phase inverter
17 THREE-
THREE-PHASE INVERTER
The inverters in the Apollo table's electrical cabinet are used to control
the 4 three-phase motors responsible for the movements of: tilting, lift,
angulation and scan.
Only 2 motors will be piloted at a time, angulation and scan or main
beam and middle beam.
The output of the inverter in fact is connected to the motor to be
activated through the action of 4 remote switches.
The model of the inverter is:

MITSHUBISHI model FR-E540 – 3,7K – EC.

SERVICE MANUAL
17.1 Inverter input/output functions
The connection of the inverter, in the specific application for the Apollo
equipment, requires the use of the commands listed below.
Number of the
Function
terminal
L1-L2-L3 Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply.
Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency
between 0 and 120 Hz.
In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be
U-V-W
reversed.
The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not
change the rotation.
This is the pole of the open collector for the RUN signal.
SE
This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed.
It is the reference 0 V for the V ref. signal (terminal 2).
5
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF
SD signals.
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V)
present when the inverter is in movement (acceleration and
deceleration ramps included).
This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the
RUN
end of the ramp.
Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be
possible to exchange the connection to the motor by means
of the remote power switch.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
STF
motor in the "FORWARD" direction.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the
STR
motor in the "BACK" direction.
Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc.
This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73
(Pr73=1 range 0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V).
2 The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input
signal in this terminal.
This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in
parameter Pr38.
This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the
inverter. This contact is closed when the inverter is under
normal functioning conditions. In the case of failure the
A-C
contact is open. The contacts of the 2 inverters are
connected in series and depend on an input of input PCB
A2.
When this input is polarised at 0 V, the inverter selects the
second set of operational parameters. The main beam and
RL
middle beam motors actually use a different booster value
from the one necessary for the angulation and scan motors.

SERVICE MANUAL
17.2 Inverter hardware setting
The inverter FR-E540 - 3,7K – EC is designed to accept inputs and pilot

outputs in PNP logic (high active) or NPN (low active).
The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE
"jumper" on the front of the inverter below the cover.
Since Apollo has been designed in NPN logic, the "jumper" will have to be
in the position SINK.
17.3 Inverter software parameters setting
To permit the use of the FR-E540 - 3,7K – EC inverter in the most

various applications, a large number of parameters that can be set are
present in the memory.
Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo, so even
if modified they will not change the functioning of the equipment, others
are used but the data contained is the default settings contained in the
basic inverter program.
In conclusion, some parameters are modified with respect to the default
value by Villa Sistemi Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by
Apollo.
The modified parameters and the non-modified parameters but ones that
interact on the functioning of Apollo are listed below and divided into
two groups, while those parameters that do not lead to any effect on the
functioning of the equipment are not mentioned.
For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter,

it is however possible to consult the dedicated manual, supplied together
with the equipment.

SERVICE MANUAL
17.3.1 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali
Param. Data Function
Boost at the start (1st parameters set). This parameter provides the
motor with a boost at the start that enables the inertia of the system to
be compensated for. Excessive adjustment generates a start of the
Pr.0 20
movement that is too brusque, while not enough adjustment can cause
the non-start of the movement in load conditions. This value is used for
the angulation and scan motors (see input RL).
Rated motor frequency (1st parameter set). The rated frequency
Pr.3 50
characteristic of the motor used must be inserted in this parameter.
Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor
Pr.7 0 determines the acceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.
Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set). Since the Apollo processor
Pr.8 0 determines the deceleration of the movement depending on the PDI
function, the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.
Activation of the functioning block for excessive current to the motor.
When setting 0, when the threshold of the maximum continuous
Pr.9 0
current limit that can be delivered by the inverter is exceeded, the
message OL is shown on the display without a stop in operations.
Rated motor voltage. The rated voltage characteristic of the motor used
Pr.19 400
must be included in this parameter.
This data is the reference frequency value for the acceleration and
Pr.20 100
deceleration parameters.
Stall prevention extreme current. This parameter indicates the limit of
Pr.22 150
the current supplied to the motor during functioning at various speeds.
This the maximum output frequency that the inverter supplies to the
Pr.38 90 motor when the analogue input of the reference signal is at the
maximum value (+10 V).
See Pr.7 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input
Pr.44 0
RL. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.
Pr.45 0
Pr.46 6
Pr.47 50
This the PWM frequency sent to the motor. The value of 13 KHz makes
Pr.72 13 it possible to eliminate the noise provided by the movement of the
motor guaranteeing however a low risk of EMC emissions.
This the parameter that determines the minimum and maximum value
Pr.73 1 that the reference analogue input for the speed can assume (0 +10
Vdc).

SERVICE MANUAL
Param. Data Function
This is the speed reference analogue signal software filter. The data 0
Pr.74 1 guarantees an immediate response of the inverter when the Vref
reference signal changes.
Pr.77 2 This data enables the modification of the parameters.
This is the parameter that makes it possible to enable the functions
Pr.79 2
of the inverter from outside signals sent to the terminal block.
This makes it possible for the terminal RL to perform the 2nd set of
Pr.180 3
parameters setting function.
This enables the status relay whose exchange contact refers to
Pr.192 11 terminals A-B-C (used for OK inverter) deactivating it with inverter
OFF or in state of alarm.
This turns on the cooling fans of the power jumper only if the
Pr.244 1 inverter is running or if the operating temperature has exceeded the
values allowed.

SERVICE MANUAL
17.3.2 Parameters that maintain the default settings
Listed here below are the parameters that, if modified, could jeopardise
the proper functioning of the equipment.
Nevertheless, this list is given to permit, in case of doubt or
malfunctioning, to check the parameter values are correct.
The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult
the inverter manual provided together with the machine for more
thorough information.
Param. Data Function Param. Data Function
Current limit reduction

Pr.1 120 Maximum frequency Pr.66 50
frequency
Pr.2 0 Minimum frequency Pr.67 0 Number of alarm resets
Pr.10 3 DC braking (voltage) Pr.68 1 Automatic reset wait time
Pr.11 0.5 DC braking (time) Pr.69 0 Reset count zeroing
Pr.12 6 DC braking (voltage) Pr.70 0 Special braking service
Pr.13 0.5 Start frequency Pr.71 0 Choice of motor
Pr.14 0 Load selection curve Pr.75 14 Select: reset, PU stop
Pr.18 120 Max high speed frequency Pr.78 0 Inversion disabling
Accelerat./decelerat. time
Pr.21 0 Pr.128 0 PID action selection
increase
Pr.37 0 Machine speed indication Pr.150 150 Current threshold level
Pr.39 50 Freq. with ref. 20 mA Pr.151 0 Current control time
Comparison of rated/real
Pr.41 10 Pr.152 5.0 Current threshold level 0
val.
Output frequency
Pr.42 6 Pr.153 0.5 Current control time 0
threshold
Reverse output frequency
Pr.43 9999 Pr.158 0 AM terminal variab. select.
threshold
Parameter group reading
Pr.52 0 PU display variable select. Pr.160 0
selection
Pr.55 50 Freq. indicat. end of scale Pr.171 0 Funct. hour counter reset
Pr.56 4 Current indic. end of scale Pr.181 1 RM terminal funct. select.
Pr.60 0 Smart mode selection Pr.182 2 RH terminal funct. select.
MRS terminal funct.
Pr.61 9999 Reference current Pr.183 6
select.
Pr.62 9999 Accelerat. ref. current Pr.191 4 FU terminal funct. select.
Pr.63 9999 Deceleration ref. current Pr.240 1 PWM soft setting
Pr.65 0 Automatic reset selection

SERVICE MANUAL
17.4 Access to parameters for writing
If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify

them, carry out the operations listed below to access the memory of the
inverter.
1. With the inverter in standby remove the front cover door.

2. Press the MODE key, the display will show the writing Pr.
3. Press the SET key. P.000 will be shown on the screen with
hundreds digit flashing.
4. To modify the hundreds data, press the keys to increase the values
or to decrease them.
5. To store the hundreds value press the SET key.
6. The tens digit flashes. To modify the data, press the keys to
increase the values or to decrease them.
7. To store the tens value press the SET key.
8. The unit digit flashes. To modify the data, press the keys to
increase the values or to decrease them.
9. Press the SET key. At this point the value in the selected parameter
is shown.
10. To modify the data in the memory, press the keys to increase the
values or to decrease them.
11. To confirm the modification press the SET key and hold it down for 3
secs. As a confirmation of the successful storage to memory the
display indicates the number of the cell and the value of the data
flashing them alternately.
12. To modify another parameter press the SET key, the next parameter
is shown on the display.
13. To select the required parameter, press the and keys and scroll
through the list.
14. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key three
times to exit the routine.
NOTE:
When the MODE key is pressed the first time, the display shows Opnd
and the second, Help.
This display shows the possibility of accessing 2 routines that are not
used.

SERVICE MANUAL
17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters
WARNING:
This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in
the inverter that has compromised all the settings.
When this procedure is carried out, the default values in the various
parameters will be stored to memory.
So, before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the
table "Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali"
must be reset and the data contained in the "Parameters that maintain
the default settings" table must be checked.
Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest
attention.
1. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for

writing " paragraph select the cell Pr.79 and change the data stored
with the value 1.
WARNING:
The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also
from the keyboard. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention
to the use of the keys until the data contained in parameter Pr.79 is
restored at value 2.
2. Press the MODE key, the display shows the PU mode.

3. Press the MODE key, the display shows the help mode.
4. Press the key four times until getting the indication ALLC. on the
display
5. Pressing the SET key, the data 0 is shown.
6. Press key to show the data 1.
7. Press for 2 secs. the key SET To confirm. The display begins to flash
indicating that the default settings has been stored to memory.
8. Press the MODE key to exit the reset procedure.
9. Reprogram the data by modifying Pr.77 parameters first followed by
Pr.79 to make access possible to all the other parameters.

SERVICE MANUAL
Function of the outputs card LEDS
18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTP

OUTPUTS
UTS PCB LEDS
On the A3 outputs PCB (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that
indicate the condition of the active output.
Figure 18-1

SERVICE MANUAL
The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed
below.
• H1 LED GROUP
LED 1 (Out 0) K7M and K9M (angulation and scan) remote switch
call
LED 2 (Out 1) K6M and K8M (main beam and middle beam)
remote switch call
LED 3 (Out 2) R-L monitor image scan reverse
LED 4 (Out 3) HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse
LED 5 (Out 4) minimum I.I. field selection
LED 6 (Out 5) medium I.I. field selection
LED 7 (Out 6) maximum I.I. field selection
LED 8 (Out 7) activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main
processor
• H2 LED GROUP
LED 9 (Out 8) spare
LED 10 (Out 9) spare
LED 11 (Out 10) SID up
LED 12 (Out 11) SID down
LED 13 (Out 12) main beam motor brake release
LED 14 (Out 13) middle beam motor brake release
LED 15 (Out 14) angulation motor brake release
LED 16 (Out 15) scan motor brake release
• H3 LED GROUP
LED 17 (Out 16) I.I. lift up
LED 18 (Out 17) I.I. lift down
LED 19 (Out 18) tabletop inside
LED 20 (Out 19) tabletop outside
LED 21 (Out 20) compressor up
LED 22 (Out 21) compressor down
LED 23 (Out 22) collimator lamp on
LED 24 (Out 23) width collimator opens
• H4 LED GROUP
LED 25 (Out 24) width collimator closes
LED 26 (Out 25) width collimator fast
LED 27 (Out 26) height collimator opens
LED 28 (Out 27) height collimator closes
LED 29 (Out 28) height collimator fast
LED 30 (Out 29) iris collimator opens
LED 31 (Out 30) iris collimator closes
LED 32 (Out 31) iris collimator fast

SERVICE MANUAL
• H5 LED GROUP
LED 33 (Out 32) angulation-main beam inverter forward
LED 34 (Out 33) angulation-main beam inverter back
LED 35 (Out 34) middle beam-scan inverter forward
LED 36 (Out 35) middle beam-scan inverter back
LED 39 (Out 38) tomo 2nd speed
LED 40 (Out 39) tomo 3rd speed
• H6 LED GROUP
LED 41 (Out 40) fluoro request
LED 42 (Out 41) X-ray request
LED 43 (Out 42) preparation request
LED 44 (Out 43) digital preparation request
LED 45 (Out 44) second step preparation request
LED 46 (Out 45) tomo 1st speed
LED 47 (Out 46) tomo 4th speed
LED 48 (Out 47) tomo 7°
• H7 LED GROUP
LED 52 (Out 51) X-ray presence without request
LED 53 (Out 52) Kv automatic-manual fluoro
LED 56 (Out 55) angio step start
• H8 LED GROUP
LED 57 (Out 56) motion detection
LED 58 (Out 57) CCD x0
LED 61 (Out 60) grid in field
LED 62 (Out 61) grid in park
LED 63 (Out 62) cassette gripper opening
LED 64 (Out 63) cassette gripping

SERVICE MANUAL
• H9 FUNCTION LEDS
LED 65 (Out 64) R cassette motor direction
LED 66 (Out 65) L cassette motor direction
LED 67 (Out 66) shutter motor direction
LED 68 (Out 67) cross subdivision motor direction
LED 69 (Out 68) R cassette motor enabling
LED 70 (Out 69) L cassette motor enabling
LED 71 (Out 70) shutter motor enabling
LED 72 (Out 71) cross subdivision motor enabling

SERVICE MANUAL
Checking the radiographic exposure results
19 CHECKING THE RADIOGR

RADIOGRAPHIC
APHIC
EXPOSURE RESULTS
19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment
The Spot Film Device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is
made, however once the installation of the system has been completed, a
further adjustment might be necessary after carrying out the test
radiographs.
To verify the correct position of the cassette, both longitudinal and

transversal, and the shutters it will be necessary to exclude the
automatic function of the collimator that could interfere in limiting the
size.
To open the collimator axles automatically to the maximum size data 1
must be input in cell 262.
When this function is active, the message " Service function active"
appears on the control desk display.

SERVICE MANUAL
19.1.1 Checking
Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette
The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam, during the
exposure program, must be correct.
An effective method for this verification is provided by the following

procedure:
1. Insert a 40x20 (17"x7") cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in
line.
2. Run the program and develop the film.
3. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. For
this verification the dimension of the separation line, determined by
the shutters is not important, but the constancy of this dimension.
4. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 (14"x14") cassette divided into
3.
If the separation lines are different, it means that the positioning of the
cassette is wrong in all its exposures.
To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the

PDI function in the cell of group 300.
The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects, so
an intervention should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is
well understood.
The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the
position error is determined by the difference that the error assumes in
function of the length of the run.
Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies
all the runs of all the subdivisions of the same quantity.
As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data
set in the cells of group 400.

SERVICE MANUAL
19.1.2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette
By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout of a film 18x24

(8"x10") or 30x24 (12"x10"), a continuous line of separation between the
upper and lower radiograms some 2 mm (0.08") thick must be obtained.
If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the
cassette is wrong.
Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical
movement with respect to the centre or by too great or too small a
movement for both sides, change the value set in cells 459 and 460.
19.1.3 Checking the positioning of the shutters

shutters
WARNING:
During these tests do not carry out limitations of the collimator width by
means of the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator.
Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various

subdivisions.
All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must
be the same width.
If this not the case, change the data contained in the cells of group 400,
in such a way as to obtain what is required.
It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has
the effect of increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the
value of the correction.
As an example let’s consider that a two line subdivision with width

cassette 30 cm (12") results from a minimum separation line (0.5 mm).
Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the
value in cell 549 (the absolute value of which is not important as it
depends on the characteristics of the system).

SERVICE MANUAL
19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-

X-ray field
19.2.1 Alignment of the X-

X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm
NOTE:
Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure
the column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these
checks can be carried out mechanically through the use of a level.
1. Bring the min SID.

2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a
distance of a few cm over the tabletop surface. If the dedicated tool is
not available, a replacement tool can be made using two elements of
different diameters (see Figure 19-1).
3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool
(a way that both the circles of the tool are completely represented in
the image).
4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings.
5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise
continue.
Tube focus
Collimator centre
Move the collimator in

this direction
min 200 mm
Correct centering
Figure 19-1

SERVICE MANUAL
6. Move the collimator with respect to the X-ray tube using the
adjustment possible in the coupling cone: the collimator must move
in the same direction as the circle furthest from the tabletop should
be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the
tabletop.
7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of
the X-ray field (in such a way that both circles of the tool are
completely represented in the image).
Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are
centred.
8. Move the SID to max position and check that the centering is
maintained; if this not the case, check the perpendicularity and
repeat the procedure from point 4.
9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both the SIDs, the
verticality of the alignment between the focus of the X-ray tube and
the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.

SERVICE MANUAL
19.3 Alignment of X-
X-ray beam with light beam
NOTE:
This procedure can be applied to systems that fit the Villa model
collimator. For systems fitting the Ralco mode collimator, refer to the
specific manual.
NOTE:
The light field of the collimator is adjusted in the factory, both for lamp
position and for position of the image surface, so, once the centering of
the X-ray beam has been carried out, the alignment of the X-ray beam –
light beam should be guaranteed.
1. To check the alignment of the X-ray beam – light beam, turn on the
light field and position 4 wads of absorbent material at the 4 edges of
the light field.
2. Expose a film and check the position of the wads with respect to the
X-ray field produced on the film; the maximum misalignment must
be equal to 3% of the SID in each direction and the sum in the two
orthogonal directions must not be over 4%.
3. If the dimensions do not coincide (indicator of the fact that the
distance of the focus of the X-ray tube from the image surface is
different from that of the lamp collimator from the same plan) the
collimator lamp can be adjusted, remembering that when the lamp
focus is brought towards the mirror, the light main beam gets
narrower while it grows bigger when it is moved away.
Tube focus Tube focus Tube focus
Light Light Light
Proper alignment Lamp movement Mirror movement
Figure 19-2
4. When the optimal alignment between light field and X-ray field is
achieved the next step can be taken to align the X-ray field and image
receiver (I.I. and Spot Film Device group).
These adjustments are easily obtained by moving the tube-collimator
integral group on the support using the adjustment margin allowed.
Furthermore, the I.I. allows a minimum of adjustment in its fixing

SERVICE MANUAL
while, in cases where the Spot Film Device needs adjusting (the
adjustment of which is governed by software and set in the factory), it is
necessary to work referring to the procedures for the adjustment and
setting of the data in the relative memory cells in the relative chapter of
this manual. The intervention on the I.I. and Spot Film Device group is
only required when in fact it has not been possible to mechanically
centre these two parts very well, but this happens rarely as this
adjustment is carried out in the factory.

SERVICE MANUAL
19.4 Collimator adjustment
19.4.1 Collimation on SFD
The collimator is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made.

Nevertheless, once installation is complete it will be necessary to check
the size of the collimated formats.
For the fluoro formats check that the axles are tangent to the I.I.
diameter. This check can be carried out by operating the collimator
joystick and checking that the shutters are immediately visible. This
must happen at all the possible zoom levels and the adjustment is made
through the setting of cells 214, 215, 216 and 217.
NOTE:
When width reduction is made by joystick, both collimator and shutters
are responsible of the reduction. Can happens that collimator and SFD
are not perfectly aligned, so in this case the image on monitor has a side
well limited and the other with a shadow. This because one side is limited
by collimator and the other by shutters. To avoid this condition is
possible to modify the shutters position in comparison with collimator
but for joystick limitation only, by using the value inserted into cell 241.
For models equipped with the Spot Film Device, use the various formats
and check that the collimator covers the selected surface.
Also check that the collimated format does not exceed 3% of the SID, the
format of the film or its subdivision.
To carry out this check, insert a cassette in the Spot Film Device and
position a cassette measuring 35x35 (14"x14") on the tabletop.
Take an exposure and develop the 35x35 (14"x14") film.
By calculating the distance between the film in the Spot Film Device and
the one on the surface check that the collimated format on the 35x35
(14"x14") film corresponds to the size of the film in the Spot Film Device
after making the appropriate proportion.
The correction of the formats can be carried out in 2 ways:

• by varying the data set in cell 218 that modifies all the format
collimation positionings except for the minimum position (collimator
closed)
• by modifying the adjustment of the potmeter minimum following the
description in the dedicated paragraph.

SERVICE MANUAL
19.4.2 External SFD collimation (for C-

C-CSA-
CSA-US version only)
The C-CSA-US version is equipped with automatic collimator with index

scale for collimated area.
These indexis must be use to recognise the collimated area on external
receptors (chest stand, external bucky, direct cassette, etc).
For each axis, a scale is present with film inch dimensions referred to
four inch SID. The indicated SID are 40", 45", 60", 72" and film range
between 5" and 17".
In direct modality the collimator axis must be done using control desk
joystick or collimator panel buttons only.
When the unit is checked in factory, the correct indexis position is

verified, meanwhile at the end of installation the correct correspondence
between indexis and irradiated areas must be checked; proceed as follow:
1. Put a 14"x17" cassette at 40" SID and collimated with indexis at
7"x7" format; expose and check the film.
2. Measure the irradiated area: must be 7"x7" ±3% SID.
3. Put a 14"x17" cassette at 40" SID and collimated with indexis at
12"x14" format; expose and check the film.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 with 72" SID.
If the irradiated areas have a deviation bigger than 3% of the SID, unlock
the index fixing screws and positioning the index correcting the error.
Repeat the checking actions as described on previous steps.
WARNING:
To allow the correct collimation, put always the receptor in
correspondence of one of the used SID.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
20 DIAGNOSTICS AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Any failure that might occur during the use of the Apollo table is, in the
majority of cases, indicated by a diagnosis message that is shown on the
display.
In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the
electronic logic of the processor.
This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the
faults deriving from displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the
second describes faults of different types.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses
Error Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures
59 Rays from generator It was detected the The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. Check
without fluoro or exposure presence of X-rays coming between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. If the level is low (0 V) even
request from the generator (access in conditions of non-emission, remove the wire coming from the generator and
X0-13 active) without connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. If the defect persists, the
fluoro / exposure request fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
or X-ray ON is still present (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
after 700ms from fluoro /
exposure request released
60 Timeout collimator or In Spot Film Device mode, When the preparation is activated or when cassette ejection is required, the collimator
shutters positioning in one of the collimator axles and the shutters must be positioned over the cassette size or subdivision. Insert a
standard program or shutters did not reach cassette 35x43 (14"x17"), select the panoramic size and press preparation. For
the position set point collimator leds 24 and 27 of the output PCB must come on indicating the movement in
within 5 secs. progress. 3 cases might occur:
A. one or both of the leds do not come on
B. one or both the leds stay on
C. after some time on, leds 24 and 25 or 27 and 28 flash
For shutters check that at prep command the movement starts to open.
Solutions:
For collimator
A. the width or height motor control circuit is faulty (output PCB)
B. the position feedback circuit or the relative potmeter are faulty
C. the movement is unstable therefore there are mechanical backlashes on the
movement between motor and potmeter or the potmeter is damaged electrically. A
temporary solution to this defect might be the increase of the dead band (cells
229, 230, 231), but this entails an increase in the tolerance of the collimated size).
Shutters are controlled by PDI system, so if the set point is not reached the reason
could be a fault in the power driver circuit located in the SFD power pcb (A4).

SERVICE MANUAL
61 Collimator or shutters In rapid sequence mode, The description of alarm 60 applies.

positioning timeout in one of the collimator axles
rapid sequence mode or shutters did not reach
the position set point
within 5 secs.
62 Ready from generator not The generator did not Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
present activate the “ready” signal low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. Remove the
within 3 secs. from the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to the
request of X-ray II step. ground on this terminal. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit
of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
63 Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or X-
operator interrupted by releasing ray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
the X-ray control. relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
64 X-ray on not present from The generator did not Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
generator activate the "X-ray" signal low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. Remove the wire coming from the
within 3 secs. from the generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal
fluoro request or within when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
0,360 secs. in exposure. the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.
65 Generator did not stop The generator X-ray time A radiography carried out on the Spot Film Device can last for a maximum of 6.5 secs.
exposure lasted longer than 6.5 secs. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after 6.5 sec
even if the X-ray request remains active. Remove the wire coming from the generator
connected on X0-13 during the emission. If the defect persists, the fault might be in
the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21)
of the CPU PCB.

SERVICE MANUAL
66 Exposure command Exposure request released The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request
released before end of X- before X-ray time (input circuit. Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
ray time X0-13) finished. depending on connector X41. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial
Can-Bus, so there can be no hardware defects at this level.
67 Preparation command Preparation request The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation
released before end of X- released before X-ray time circuit. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
ray time (input X0-13) finished. depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via
serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
68 Generator stopped X-ray The generator interrupted A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the Tomo
during Tomo angle the X-ray emission before angle. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission. Check
the tomography angle was between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must stay low (0
completed. V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. Make a jumper between X0-13 and
the ground for the tomography time. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the
pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of
the CPU PCB.
69 Generator did not stop The generator continued Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with an oscilloscope. The level must go
exposure at the end of the X-ray emission for high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. Check that the generator does not
Tomo angle more than 0.2 secs. after show a “tail” of this signal for more than 700 msecs. After the X-ray request of the
the X-ray control was table is off. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input
deactivated. PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
70 Compressor did not reach The compressor did not The table logic activates the return of the compressor to the park when access to
park position in tomo and reach the parking position tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. If the compressor does not reach the
angio modality within 30 secs. from the parking position (switch S26, input X15-2 input PCB) the fault might be on the
activation of the control for compressor motor control circuit (outlets X26 pin 9 and 10 output PCB) or on the A15
the access in tomo or angio power PCB. A check must also be made to see that the X15-2 input depending on the
modality access. park switch is at a high level when the compressor has activated the switch.

SERVICE MANUAL
77 Preparation request In angiographic mode the Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
interrupted by digital DSI generator ready signal is low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated. Remove the wire
absent. coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground
on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.
78 Program aborted In angio modality, the X- The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and X-
ray sequence was ray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
interrupted before the set relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
number of steps was the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.
completed.
80 General emergency The power relay (input The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input X15-10
X15-10) was deactivated by is not at low level. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact of the
external causes. power relay K1L. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the break in
the series circuit of the movement emergency switch (X0 pin 5 and 6).
82 Anti-crusching circuit The anti-pinching control The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). If the control is
damaged circuit is interrupted. active, the input X14-5 (input PCB) must be active (0 V). Check the membrane circuit
series and the Spot Film Device PCB A10.
83 SFD is disabled The Spot Film Device was This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the request of a Spot Film Device function
disabled, therefore the if cell 261 is set at 1.
adjustment of the
components inside the
Spot Film Device is not
possible.
84 I.I. lift not present The I.I. lift is not present in In potmeter adjustment mode, with cell 133 active an attempt is made to move the I.I.
the system. lift, but the setting of the presence of this function (cell 255 is 1).
88 Wrong SID The SID has not been set In potmeter adjustment mode, with one of the collimator setting axles cells active (ad
properly. 117 to 122) an attempt is made to store the value to memory but the SID (shown on
the display) does not correspond to 1080 mm.

SERVICE MANUAL
89 The minimum has not The minimum position was In potmeter adjustment mode, an attempt is made to store the maximum value of one
been adjusted. not stored. of the collimator potmeters (width, height or iris), without adjusting the minimum
first.
90 EEPROM data damaged The RAM has detected a Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the
non-intentional change of RAM with the previous data through the checksum. If they do not correspond, it
the data in the EEprom. means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. You are recommended to change
the Eeprom that could be defective.
91 Angulation movement over During the movement, the The movement of the angulation is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
max error angulation has must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
accumulated a position position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 311. Exceeding this tolerance
error above the one set in might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
the cell 311. seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
92 Scan movement over max During the movement, the The movement of the scan is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory must
error scan has accumulated a therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position
position error above the is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. Exceeding this tolerance might be
one set in cell 329. caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of
the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
93 Main beam movement over During the movement, the The movement of the main beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
max error main beam has must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
accumulated a position position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance
error above the one set in might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total
cell 346. seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the

SERVICE MANUAL
94 Middle beam movement During the movement, the The movement of the middle beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real
over max error middle beam has trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of
accumulated an error the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this
position over the one set in tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or
cell 346. total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
95 Shutters movement over During the movement, the The movement of the shutters is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
max error shutters have accumulated must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
a position error above the position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 363. Exceeding this tolerance
one set in cell 363. might be caused by a fault in the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total
seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
96 Right cassette belt During the movement, the The right cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
movement over max error right belt has accumulated must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
a position error above the position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
one set in cell 375. be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
97 Left cassette belt During the movement, the The left cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. The real trajectory
movement over max error left belt has accumulated a must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real
position error above the position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this tolerance might
one set in cell 375. be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing
up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to
the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

SERVICE MANUAL
98 Cross subdivision During the movement, the The sideway cassette movement by cross subdivision is an axle controlled by PDI logic.
movement over max error cross subdivision has The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay
accumulated a position tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 399. Exceeding
error above the one set in this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a
cell 399. partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell
is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be
removed.
99 Inverter fault One or both inverters are The input X18-1 (input PCB) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper
in a warning status, working conditions. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters, the series circuit
therefore access X18-1 is dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated. The cause of the fault must
deactivated. be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired.
101 Angulation potmeter under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
min angulation potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is lower than the
below that stored in minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
Eeprom. by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be
measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB.
102 Angulation potmeter over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
max angulation potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is over the maximum plus
above that stored in the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
Eeprom. that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the
connector X20-4 of the input PCB.

SERVICE MANUAL
103 Scan potmeter under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
scan potmeter is below the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is lower than the minimum
that stored in Eeprom. minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.
104 Scan potmeter over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
scan potmeter is above the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is over the maximum plus the
that stored in Eeprom. value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured
on connector X20-5 of the input PCB.
105 Main beam potmeter under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
min main beam potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is lower than the
Eeprom. by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB.
106 Main beam potmeter over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
max potmeter of the main beam the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is over maximum
is above that stored in plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
Eeprom. movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the

SERVICE MANUAL
107 Middle beam potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
under min middle beam potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the middle beam potmeter is lower than the
below that stored in minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
Eeprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
108 Middle beam potmeter over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
max potmeter of the main beam the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the middle beam is over the
is above that stored in maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
Eeprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
109 Width Wall Bucky cassette The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter under min width Wall Bucky cassette the Eeprom. If the current value of the width Wall Bucky cassette is lower than the
potmeter is below that minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
stored in Eeprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
110 Width Wall Bucky cassette The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter over max width Wall Bucky cassette the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the width Wall Bucky cassette is
potmeter is above that over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
stored in Eeprom. caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the
break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the
converter to be measured on connector X20-8 of the input PCB.

SERVICE MANUAL
111 Transversal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter under min tabletop potmeter is below the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is lower than the
that stored in Eeprom. minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit because of the
break in the power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
112 Transversal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter over max tabletop potmeter is above the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is over maximum plus
that stored in Eeprom. the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
113 SID potmeter under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
SID potmeter is below that the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is lower than the minimum
stored in Eeprom. less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
114 SID potmeter over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
SID potmeter is above that the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is over maximum plus the
stored in Eeprom. value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the

SERVICE MANUAL
115 Height Wall Bucky cassette The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter under min height Wall Bucky cassette the Eeprom. If the current value of the height Wall Bucky cassette is lower than the
potmeter is below that minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
stored in Eeprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
116 Height Wall Bucky cassette The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter over max height Wall Bucky cassette the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the height Wall Bucky cassette is
potmeter is above that over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
stored in Eeprom. caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the
break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
117 Width collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
under min width collimator potmeter the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is lower than
is less than the one stored the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
in EEprom. by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
118 Width collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
over max width collimator potmeter the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is over
is above that stored in maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
EEprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the

SERVICE MANUAL
119 Height collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
under min potmeter of the height the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
collimator is less than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
one stored in EEprom. by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
120 Height collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
over max potmeter of the collimator the Eeprom. If the current value of the height collimator axle potmeter is over
height is above that stored maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
in EEprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
121 Iris collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
under min potmeter of the iris the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the
collimator is less than that minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
stored in EEprom. the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the

SERVICE MANUAL
122 Iris collimator potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
over max potmeter of the iris the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is over maximum
collimator is above that plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
stored in EEprom. movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
123 Compression force The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter under min compressor potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is lower than the
Eeprom. by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potmeter. Check the presence of the
power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the
input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB.
124 Compression force The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
potmeter over max compressor potmeter is the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is over maximum
above that stored in plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
Eeprom. movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
125 Grid potmeter under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
grid potmeter is below that the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid is lower than the minimum
stored in Eeprom. minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the

SERVICE MANUAL
126 Grid potmeter over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
grid potmeter is above that the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid potmeter is over maximum plus the value
stored in Eeprom. set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that,
because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
127 Gripping potmeter under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
min gripping potmeter is below the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potmeter is lower than the minimum
that stored in EEprom. minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
128 Gripping potmeter over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
max potmeter of the gripping is the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potmeter is over maximum
above that stored in plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
EEprom. movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the
power supply potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
129 Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
under min cross subdivision potmeter the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision is lower than the minimum
is below that stored in minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
EEprom. movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the

SERVICE MANUAL
130 Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
over max cross subdivision potmeter the Eeprom. If the current value of the cross subdivision movement is over maximum
is above that stored in plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
EEprom. movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
131 Shutters potmeter under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
min shutters potmeter is below the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutters potmeter is lower than the minimum
that stored in Eeprom. minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
132 Shutters potmeter over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
max shutters potmeter is above the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutter potmeter is over maximum plus the
that stored in Eeprom. value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that
because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply
potmeter circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
133 The angulation potmeter An angulation potmeter This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
max is lower than min max under the min was because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.

SERVICE MANUAL
134 The scan potmeter max is A scan potmeter max This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
lower than min under the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
135 The main beam potmeter A main beam potmeter This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
136 The middle beam potmeter A middle beam potmeter This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
137 The width Wall Bucky A width Wall Bucky This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
cassette potmeter max is cassette potmeter max because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
lower than min under the min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
138 The transversal tabletop A tabletop potmeter max This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
potmeter max is lower than under the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
min digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
139 The SID potmeter max is A SID potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
lower than min the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
140 The height Wall Bucky A height Wall Bucky This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
cassette potmeter max is cassette potmeter max because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
lower than min under the min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum

SERVICE MANUAL
141 The max of the width A width collimator This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
collimator potmeter is less potmeter max value under because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
than the min the min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
142 The max of the iris A height collimator This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
collimator potmeter is potmeter max value under because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
lower than the min the min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
143 The max of the iris An iris collimator potmeter This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
collimator potmeter is max value under the min because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
lower than the min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
144 The max of the A compressor potmeter This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
compression force max under the min was because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
potmeter is lower than the stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
min has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
145 The grid potmeter max is A grid potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
lower than min the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
146 The gripping potmeter max A gripping potmeter max This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
is lower than min value under the min was because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
147 The cross subdivision A cross subdivision This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
potmeter max is lower than potmeter max under the because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
min min was stored. digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum

SERVICE MANUAL
148 The shutter potmeter max A shutter potmeter max This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
is lower than min under the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
156 Serial line: timeout from The data does not arrive on The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
Supervis. to Main µP the serial line from the series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
supervisor to the main µP the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
for longer than 0.3 secs. CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
• supervisor TX
• main RX.
157 Serial line: timeout from The data does not arrive on The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in
Main µP to supervisor the serial line from the series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
main µP to the supervisor the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
for longer than 0.3 secs. CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). This interruption is interrupted on the
line:
• supervisor RX
• main TX.
158 Single Fault open at The Single Fault circuit is The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on.
switch on. not closed, therefore access Furthermore there are jumpers where optional components could be connected.
X13-24 is not at 0 V when Measure the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off:
the table is powered on. • control desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command: X42- with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).

SERVICE MANUAL
159 Inputs close at switch on A joystick or double control When the table is powered up, a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs
button are active when the relative to the commands present on the control desk and the table-mounted
table is powered up. command. If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active, then an alarm is
present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during the
powering up procedure or by a faulty command. The state of the table-mounted
control keys (PCB A8), of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad), the control
desk joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c.s.) and the soft-touch
keys of the control desk on the connector X44.
160 Single fault open SID up=1 The SID lift control is The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
/ serial bit 0=0 probably active when the receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU PCB) the activation
SF is open and the output signal, in addition to that of the SF is open. Nevertheless, the serial confirmation of
port is active, but the the movement, sent by the main processor is not present. The cause of the fault might
supervisor does not receive be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the
the serial confirmation of parallel line dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the second
the control activation. hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.
161 Single fault open SID up=0 The supervisor detects the The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The supervisor
/ serial bit 0=1 open SF and the serial recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement
confirmation that the SID activation on the serial line. On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU PCB)
lift control is active, but there is not however an activation signal. The cause of the fault might be due to a
the output port is not defect on the serial line by one of the processors, or by a HW fault on the parallel line
active. dependent on a V7. It must be remembered that, to confirm the first hypothesis there
must also be a fault on the SF line that is open.
162 Single fault open SID The SID control down is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
down =1 / serial bit 1=0 probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of
the control activation.

SERVICE MANUAL
163 Single fault open SID The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
down =0 / serial bit 1=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
confirmation that the SID reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB).
down control is active, but
the output port is not
active.
164 Single fault open tabletop The tabletop in control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
in=1 / serial bit 2=0 probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
165 Single fault open tabletop The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
in=0 / serial bit 2=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
confirmation that the reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB).
tabletop in control is
active, but the output port
is not active.
166 Single fault open tabletop The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
out=1 / serial bit 3=0 probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the

SERVICE MANUAL
167 Single fault open tabletop The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
out=0 / serial bit 3=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
confirmation that the reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB).
tabletop out control is
is not active.
168 Single fault open The compressor lift control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
compressor up=1 / serial is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
bit 4=0 SF is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
169 Single fault open The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
compressor up=0 / serial open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
bit 4=1 confirmation that the reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB).
compressor lift control is
is not active.
170 Single fault open The compressor down What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
compressor down =1 / control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
serial bit 5=0 when the SF is open and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
the output port is active,
but the supervisor does not
receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.

SERVICE MANUAL
171 Single fault open The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
compressor down =0 / open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
serial bit 5=1 confirmation that the the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB).
compressor down control is
is not active.
172 Single fault open A5 The A5 inverter enabling What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beam-
6=0 when the SF is open and angulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
the output port is active, (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
receive the serial
activation.
173 Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beam-
6=1 confirmation that the A5 angulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13
inverter enabling control is (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB).
is not active.
174 Single fault open A6 The A6 inverter enabling What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
7=0 when the SF is open and beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
the output port is active, and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
receive the serial
activation.

SERVICE MANUAL
175 Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle
7=1 confirmation that the A6 beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards)
inverter enabling control is and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).
is not active.
180 Single fault close / SID The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The movement activation
up=1 (closed) but the SID lift circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard ) is active but the SF series circuit is
control output port is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
active.
181 Single fault closed / SID The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. The movement
down=1 (closed) but the SID down activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
control output port is circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
active.
182 Single fault close / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. The movement
tabletop in=1 (closed) but the tabletop activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
control output port is circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
active.
183 Single fault close / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. The movement
tabletop out=1 (closed) but the tabletop activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
out control output is circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
active.
184 Single fault close / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement
compressor up=1 (closed) but the activation circuit dependent on the diode V11 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
compressor lift control circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
output port is active.
185 Single fault closed / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. The movement
compressor down=1 (closed) but the activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series
compressor down control circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
output port is active.

SERVICE MANUAL
186 Single fault close / A5 The SF circuit is not active There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5
inverter enable =1 (closed) but the A5 inverter inverter (main beam – angulation). The movement activation circuit dependent on
enabling command output diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is
port is active. closed. A check must be made to see which of the circuits the fault is on.
187 Single fault close / A6 The SF circuit is not active There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A6
inverter enable=1 (closed) but the A6 inverter inverter (middle beam – scan). The movement activation circuit dependent on a diodes
enabling command output V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A
port is active. check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
191 The angulation potmeter The angulation control is The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time
does not move with active active but potmeter checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
control feedback does not detect applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
the motion. aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672. The
cause of the alarm might be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potmeter slip
• values of the cells 671 and 672 insufficient.

SERVICE MANUAL
192 The scan potmeter does The scan movement The main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time
not move with active control is active but the checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
control potmeter feedback does not applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
detect the motion. aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 673 and 674.
The cause of the alarm might be:
• potmeter slip
193 The main beam potmeter The main beam movement The main processor activates the main beam movement command and at the same
does not move with active control is active but the time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
control potmeter feedback does not speeds applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
detect the motion. not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675
and 676. The cause of the alarm might be:
• potmeter slip

SERVICE MANUAL
194 The middle beam potmeter The middle beam The main processor activates the middle beam movement output and at the same time
does not move with active movement control is active checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds
control. but the potmeter feedback applied. The alarm generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
does not detect the motion. aligned with what is applied as per paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first stages of motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
• potmeter slip
195 The shutter potmeter does The shutters movement The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time
not move with active control is active but the checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed
control. potmeter feedback does not applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not
detect the motion. aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident
in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the difference
• potmeter slip

SERVICE MANUAL
196 Right belt cassette encoder The R cassette movement The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same
does not move with active belt is active but the time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
control motion is not detected to the applied speeds. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
through the encoder speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
feedback. more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
• encoder slip
197 Left belt cassette encoder The L cassette movement The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same
does not move with active belt is active but the time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
control motion is not detected to the applied speed. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the
through the encoder speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is
feedback. more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When
the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed
detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain
time, the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in
cells 681 and 682. The cause of the alarm might be:
• encoder slip

SERVICE MANUAL
198 The cross subdivision The cross subdivision The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the same
potmeter does not move movement control is active time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
with active control. but the potmeter feedback speed applied. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is
does not detect the motion. not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more
evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. When the
difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected
(potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the
alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 685
and 686. The cause of the alarm might be:
• potmeter slip
201 Angulation potmeter in There is no angulation The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected
movement without request movement control but through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
motion is detected through inserted in cell 452. The cause might be because:
the potmeter feedback. • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electric potmeter circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the
input as soon as it is powered up.

SERVICE MANUAL
202 Scan potmeter in There has been no scan The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through the
movement without request movement output but potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
motion has been detected cell 453. The cause might be because:
by the potmeter feedback. • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
203 Main beam potmeter in There has been no main The main processor did not activate the main beam movement but has detected
movement without request beam movement output through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
but motion is detected by inserted in cell 454. The cause might be because:
processor)
• break in the potmeter circuit.
If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up
"moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.
204 Middle beam potmeter in There is no middle beam The main processor did not activate the middle beam movement but has detected
movement without request movement output but through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)
• break in the electric potmeter connection circuit.
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference signal pull up "moves" the

SERVICE MANUAL
206 Transversal tabletop There is no tabletop The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through
potmeter in movement movement output but the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
without request motion is detected by the inserted in cell 456. The cause might be because:
potmeter feedback. • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
207 SID potmeter in movement There is no SID movement The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the
without request output but motion is potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
detected through the cell 457. The cause might be because:
processor)
turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken, the reference pull up signal "moves" the
212 Compression force There is no compression The compressor is in park but, through the potmeter feedback, it is seen that there
potmeter in movement control but motion is has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). The cause might have
without request detected through the been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in the
potmeter feedback. electric potmeter circuit.
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.

SERVICE MANUAL
213 Grid potmeter in There is no grid movement The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the
movement without request output but motion is potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in
detected through the cell 449. The cause might be because:
processor)
• break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit.
214 Gripping potmeter in There is no gripping The main processor has not activated the gripping movement but has detected
movement without request movement control but through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)
• break in the potmeter circuit.
215 Cross subdivision potmeter There is no cross The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has detected
in movement without subdivision movement through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
request control but motion is inserted in cell 449. The cause might be because:
detected through the • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
potmeter feedback. processor)

SERVICE MANUAL
216 Shutter potmeter in There is no shutter The main processor did not activate the shutter movement but has detected through
movement without request movement output but the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)
218 Transversal tabletop The transversal tabletop The movement of the tabletop is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
movement over max error movement exceeded the speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 235.
error value set in cell 447. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 447. The alarm can be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.
220 SID movement over max The SID movement The movement of the SID is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The
error exceeded the error value speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 236.
set in cell 448. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account, an error
is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value the error can reach is
inserted in cell 448. The alarm can be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potmeter
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage.
226 Compressor down output No compressor movement The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that
active without feedback feedback present when the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.
input down control is active.

SERVICE MANUAL
227 Compressor outputs not The compressor movement The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1
active with feedback active. feedback is active without input PCB is active at 0 V.
movement commands.
228 Compressor up output No compressor movement The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the
active without feedback feedback present when lift compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there.
input control is active.
231 Single Fault open without SF circuit is open but no This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
active inputs movement control is while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
recognised. fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.
Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit (input X13-
24 input PCB).
Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit:
• command desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).
232 Single Fault close with One or more movement This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
active inputs controls present but SF while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
circuit is not active fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
(closed). control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.
240 Right cass. belt movement Right cass. belt motor The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
overcurrent movement exceeded circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U1 sends
maximum current 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
threshold. be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M5 motor, D1 driver, U1 optoisolator).

SERVICE MANUAL
241 Left cass. belt movement Left cass. belt motor The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation
overcurrent movement exceeded circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U2 sends
maximum current 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might
threshold. be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one
of the components (M6 motor, D2 driver, U2 optoisolator).
242 Shutters overcurrent Shutters movement motor The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current
exceeded maximum limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the
current threshold. optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). The
exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or
by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers, U4
optoisolator).
243 Cross subdivision Cross subdivision The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation
overcurrent movement motor exceeded circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U3
maximum current sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit
threshold. might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault
on one of the components (M10 motor, D3 and D4 drivers, U3 optoisolator).
300 Cassette loading error The cassette did not reach When the cassette transport command is activated, the processor wants to recognise
the format recognition the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 input PCB) active within 1 sec.
photocell within 1 sec. The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by the
cassette moving too slowly. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser,
the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the
cassette.
301 Grid movement timeout The grid did not reach the The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs. If the set point is not
destination (parking or reached the cause might be:
position 0) within 8 secs. • an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same.
• dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point
• break in the movement circuit (engine M7, fuse F23, driver D7).

SERVICE MANUAL
302 Gripping movement The gripping did not reach The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 8 secs. If the set point is
timeout destination (cassette not reached the cause might be:
opening or closing) within • electrical potmeter fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the opening)
8 secs. • gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 input PCB) (only for the closure)
• dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only
for the opening)
• break in the movement circuit (engine M9, fuse F22, driver D8).
303 Cassette size photosensor Cassette size photosensor The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 input PCB) must be deactivated
not released is obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. The alarm might be
8 secs. caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of the
cassette. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of the
cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette.
304 Simultaneous drivers The SW controlled the The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation PCB) to pins 5
enable gripping open / close and 7 have been sent simultaneously. This causes a short circuit that damages the
control drivers components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 output PCB
simultaneously. should be checked.
305 I.I. lift movement timeout The I.I. lift did not reach When the I.I. lift up movement is activated the input X15-4 (switch S28) must be
destination (up / down end deactivated within 3 secs. When I.I. lift down movement is activated the input X15-5
run) within 3 secs (switch S29) must be deactivated within 3 secs. The non arrival of the movement at
destination might be caused by a mechanical movement failure or an electronic fault
of one of the circuit components (switch S28 or 29, motor M12, remote switch K4M
and K5M, relay K10 and K11 output PCB).

SERVICE MANUAL
306 Timeout shutters or cross Cross subdivision or When the I.I. lift is called, the shutters must reach the corresponding position to the
subdivision movement for shutter movements did not min potmeter adjustment and the subdivision movement in a cross must reach the
I.I. lift call reach position to allow I.I. centre. Failure to reach these set points within 5 secs. activates the alarm. This might
lift due to a control error. be caused by a fault on one of the control circuits of these movements. See the
description for alarm 302 for the gripping circuits. For the shutters the data of the
cells 300 relative at that moment are valid.
500 RAM-EEPROM: data A functioning failure Data in Eeprom are compared with that in the Ram when the equipment is powered
missing detected on Eeprom. up. If the check shows that there is no correspondence between the data and the
checksum the alarm is generated. The Eeprom or the Ram must be replaced.
501 RAM-EEPROM: writing It was not possible to In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. Replace the Eeprom; it is
timeout transfer data to Eeprom. probably defective.
502 RAM-EEPROM: failed Data in Eeprom are The comparison of the data was wrong during Eeprom copying (cell 702). Replace the
verification different from those in Eeprom; it is probably defective.
RAM.
503 RAM-EEPROM: wrong Data in Eeprom cannot be It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701). Repeat the
Eeprom reading. read. operation or replace the Ram.
907 Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. The cause might be due to an operator
switch on button are active when the error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key.
table is powered up. Check that the control desk keys, keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal have the
NO contact open in the rest position.
910 CAN line Timeout between CAN bus line interruption Check connection between pins X8.1 (cabinet CPU side) and X8.13 (console side) and
console and main between console and main between pins X8.2 (cabinet CPU side) and X8.5 (console side).
µProcessor CPU. Verify components D12 on console board and D16 on cabinet CPU side and the
related circuits.

SERVICE MANUAL
961 FLASH-EPROM erasing The Flash-Eprom was not With page 719 active (deletion of alarm history) or a page between 853 and 867 (cycle
failed erased to reset the deletion) the flash eprom is not reset. Repeat the operation or replace the flash eprom.
warnings or cycles history.
962 FLASH-EPROM writing The Flash-Eprom did not The alarm history or the updating of the table cycles is not written on the flash eprom.
failed allow to write data relative Replace the probably defective flash eprom.
to history.
999 Data lost in RAM. Check Data no longer in RAM. On powering up the Ram is seen to have no data. This might be caused by a defect in
battery the Ram or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Check the ends of the battery
on the CPU PCB to see that there is a voltage of 3.6 V. Change the battery if the
voltage is not high enough or change the Ram if the defect persists.

SERVICE MANUAL
20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor
20.2.1 Table
Fault or malfunction Reason Corrective measures
During the tilting, the The I.I. does not escape the The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without
message "Limit reached" is ascent band and enters the stopping if it the I.I. gets too close to the floor. To ensure this condition a ascent band
often displayed". collision zone. is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.I.-floor height. When the I.I. enters the ascent
band, the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anti-collision movement. If
the band is too small, the I.I. might not manage to escape and enter the safety zone.
The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased.
The movements controlled Check parameters not If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
with the table PDI (tilting, regulated properly. the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
lift, scan, angulation) are not described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
smooth. modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
jerks and vibrations. Remember that if the reduction is too great the gains make the
positioning inaccurate.
At switch ON the message Input X0-17 is not connected to If no safety barrier devices are installed in the room, check that input X0-17 is
"LIMIT BARRIER" is 0V. connected to 0 V. If safety barrier devices are installed, check that the devices are
displayed functional and that are not activated by elements of the table or any other object
The compressor is not Wrong adjustment of the After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit,
brought into the field. compression force minimum access the potmeter adjustment routine and cell 123, check that the value of the
photometer. potmeter with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. If this not
the case, an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the compressor
is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase the value of
the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and then to activate
the descent movement. If the movement is activated, the minimum value of the
potmeter must then be adjusted.

SERVICE MANUAL
The horizontal position of The main and middle beam The horizontal position of the table is obtained thanks to the combination of the main
the table is not correct. potmeters have not been and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
adjusted properly. very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.
The vertical or The main and middle beam The extreme positions of the table are obtained thanks to the combination of the main
Trendelembourg position of potmeters have not been and middle beam positions. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams
the table is not correct. adjusted properly. very carefully, as described in paragraph 10.1.4.
Check the data in cells 409 and 410 that determine the stop position.
The equipment does not Lack of power supply to the Check the presence of the single-phase voltage to the T2 transformer primary. Check
come on. logical circuits. that the thermomagnetic cut out Q1 is closed. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken.
The tomo layer is not The geometry of some of the As the tomography of the Apollo table is completely electronic, the layer position is
correct. table's mechanical components calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's mechanical
is different. dimensions. A defect like this can be corrected by modifying the data contained in cell
438.
The main and middle beam The correspondence of the A sophisticated algorithm manages the main and middle beam movement used for the
collision switch often cuts in. main beam's position with that tilting and lift functions. An anti-collision switch prevents a collision being generated
of the middle beam is wrong. between main and middle beam. If this switch cuts in during movements, the cause
might be:
• main and middle beam potmeter adjustment not correct. A new adjustment must
be done as described in paragraph 10.1.4
• adjustment of particularly sparse PDI gains. The setting must be changed as
described in paragraph 11.2.1.

SERVICE MANUAL
20.2.2 Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version)
With I.I. lift high, there is a The adjustment of the shutter Recalibrate the shutter potmeter that should have a minimum position corresponding
collision between I.I. and potmeter is wrong. to an opening of 475 mm (18.7"), see paragraph 10.1.16.
shutters.
With I.I. lift high, there is a The potmeter adjustment of the Recalibrate the gripping potmeter adjustment that should have a minimum position
collision between I.I. and gripping opening is wrong. corresponding to an opening of 463 mm (18.2"), see paragraph 10.1.14.
cassette guides. If the opening should again prove to be critical, check the set value in cell 228 (dead
band gripping opening) that could be excessive.
The movements controlled Check parameters are not If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
with PDI of the Spot Film correctly regulated. the movements lose their smoothness. Before adjusting these parameters, read what is
Device (longitudinal cassette, described in paragraph 11.2.1. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are
transversal cassette and modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without
shutters) are not fluid. jerks and vibrations. Remember that too great a reduction of the gains makes the
positioning imprecise.
The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective. Check fuse F22 positioned on the PCB A10 on the Spot Film Device. If it is seen to be
movement is not working. broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the Spot Film Device
violently, on opening.
Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4), when the gripping devices
do not lock on the cassette.

SERVICE MANUAL
The fluoro exposure The positioning of the cassette, The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette, shutters and
time is long. of the shutters or of the collimator reach the correct position. It must therefore be checked which of these
collimator does not occur in the three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point.
regular times. If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements, check to see if there are
mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the paragraph
11.2.1.
If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles, the cause of this defect might
be due to:
A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.
The cassette is not Wrong use of the cassette or The correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inch) and the data in cell
recognised. defect in the size reading 257 is checked. It should be checked that the cassette size used is in the range
photosensor. allowed (see size table and cm division paragraph 4.2 and inch paragraph 4.3.
If the above is correct, check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input
X14-2).

SERVICE MANUAL
The 43 cm (17") high cassette The gripping device opening is The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the
is inserted with difficulty in not big enough. maximum height. Repeat the gripping device opening potmeter adjustment procedure
the Spot Film Device. (see paragraph 10.1.14). Check the value of the cell 228. If this value is too big, the
gripping device might not be able to open wide enough.
The horizontal radiogram The transversal movement of Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potmeter paragraph 10.1.15.
subdivision line (cross the cassette is wrong. Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that:
subdivision program) is not • if the separation line is too wide, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
the required size. reduced
• if the separation line is too narrow, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
increased
• modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the
cassette.
The vertical radiogram The positioning of the shutters The shutters and the width collimator are responsible for the subdivision of the
subdivision lines are not of is incorrect. radiograms. If the white separation lines do not have a clear border, this means that
the size required. the limitation is carried out by the collimator. The collimator potmeters adjustment,
paragraphs 10.1.9 width, 10.1.10 height, 10.1.11 iris, must therefore be adjusted.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem. If the separation line has a clear border, the position of the shutters needs to
be changed.
If the error is constant over all the sizes and subdivisions, the shutter potmeters
adjustment must be adjusted as described in paragraph 10.1.16. If the error is only
present on a few subdivision programs, the cell whose parameter is to be modified
among those present in the table of paragraph 11.3.4.2 must be identified.
The fluoroscopic image The grid centering is not The central position of the grid is not correct, it must be modified by changing the
shows one side darker than correct. parameter in cell 220.
the other.

SERVICE MANUAL
20.2.3 Collimator
One or more collimator axles HW adjustment wrong or The causes of this defect may be:
oscillate when achieving the reduced positioning window. A- HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
set point. The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described in
the paragraph 16.1.2
B- Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the
increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle with
the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase in this
value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.
The exposed collimation is The collimated sizes do not Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.9 width, 10.1.10
not correct. correspond with film size. height, 10.1.11 iris.
Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the
problem.
The fluoro collimation is not The collimator sizes do not Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1.9 width, 10.1.10
correct. correspond with I.I. fields. height, 10.1.11 iris.
Check the data in the cells 214÷217 and modify them according to dimensions of the
fields of the I.I. installed.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
Maintenance and cleaning
21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

CLEANING
As all electrical equipments, this unit requires not only a correct usage,
but also maintenance and checks on a regular basis.
This precaution ensures efficient, long-lasting functioning.
Apollo contains mechanical parts such as, bearings, cables and springs
that are subject to natural wear and tear.
To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator, the
equipment must be checked and maintained regularly.
The electromechanical and electronic components contained in the units

must be adjusted correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give
quality radiographic images, to provide top levels of electrical safety and
contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits.
NOTE:
The Service Engineer has to take special care for all what concerns
electrical safety of the device and must make sure of restoring all
provisions for electrical safety which may be affected during a service
intervention and to solicit the customer to have the electrical safety tests
repeated every time the intervention has caused the replacement of
important parts or the intervention has significantly affected safety
provisions of the device.
Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21.1) or by

the authorised engineer (paragraph 21.2).

SERVICE MANUAL
21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out
The check carried out directly by the operator are the following:
Frequency Type of check Method
Daily Check the working of the light indicators and Visual

LEDs located on the control desk inspection
Daily Functioning of joysticks and buttons located on Visual
the control desk and on the panel on the side of inspection
the table
Daily Absence of contrast liquid residuals Visual
inspection
Daily Check smooth flow and noise of movements Visual
inspection
Monthly Integrity of equipment and labels Visual
inspection
WARNING:
The operator is recommended to carry out the controls before each
working session.
In case of irregularities, high noisiness of motorised components, or
failures, the operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.

SERVICE MANUAL
21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the

Authorised Technician
It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali

services the equipment once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top
condition.
WARNING:
Preventive and/or corrective operations may only be carried out by Villa
Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel.
At the maintenance stage, the performance of the equipment is checked

and if possible adjusted in line with the indications in the previous
chapters as summarised in the following table:
Type of check Method
Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath Visual inspection
with particular attention to the Spot Film Device covers
X-ray beam centering check Paragraph 19.2
X-ray field – light field correspondence check Paragraph 19.2
Cassette size subdivision control Paragraph 19.1
Checking of the movements and operability of the control Visual inspection
desk and the table-mounted control
Checking of the tilting, angulation and tabletop centering Visual inspection
Checking of the chain voltage Chapter 6
Check of the level of lubricant in the reduction units Practical control
Check of the motor belts Practical control
Check of the state of main beam bearings, SID Visual inspection
Check of the state of the Spot Film Device gripping Visual inspection
movement belts
WARNING:
Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced.
WARNING:
For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the
Authorised Technician, you are recommended to adhere to the
information reported in chapter 8 of the User's manual.

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
Wiring diagrams and drawings
22 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS

The connections of the cables used on the Apollo tables are made with
the use of connectors.
The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing:
Pin number
Connection number

SERVICE MANUAL
22.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings
1. Interconnection diagram
2. Power supply diagram
3. Functional drawing
4. Cabinet layout
5. A1 CPU PCB layout
6. A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram
7. A2 Input PCB layout
8. A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
9. A3 Output PCB layout
10. A3 Output PCB wiring diagram
11. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout
12. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram
13. A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout
14. A8 Table keyboard PCB layout
15. A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram
16. A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout
17. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram
18. A11 Base unit connector PCB layout
19. A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram

SERVICE MANUAL
20. A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout
21. A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram
22. A13 Angulation connector PCB layout
23. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram
24. A14 Control desk - CPU PCB layout
25. A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram
26. A15 Compressor PCB layout
27. A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram
28. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB layout
29. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB wiring diagram
30. A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram

SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MANUAL
X50 – R5: Shutters pot. X60–B1:Cassette Encoder

D-SUB Connector ELECTRONIC CABINET A2 X14
X51 – R6: Gripping pot.
INPUT X61–B4/5:Cassette size sensor
Connector for FLAT CABLE – 22V∼ TRDX+/- X34 X52 – R7: Cross subdivision pot. X62–B2:Cass.present sensor (Emitter)
Screws connectors X33 48V∼ A2 X19
TRSA+/- X35 X53 – R8: Grid pot. X63–B3:Cass.present sensor (Receiver)
INPUT
LIM+/- X36
X54 – M5: Cass.Right belt A10 X66–S33:Cassette gripping switch
X12
X68 X55 – M6: Cass. Left belt Spot Film X67–Test Point
DC+/- X37 Device PCB
A4 X68
X44 X56 – M7: Grid motor (not present on X101,102,103–Emergency switches
Spot Film Device GR+/- X38
IN56…IN59
A1 Motor Driver PCB X57 – M8: Shutters motor “All Digital” X64,65–Anti-entrapment device
T.S.O. PCB
X10 20V∼ GN+/- X39 version)
(not present on (Optional - standard on C-CSA-US vers)
CPU A2 X16 X58 – M9: Gripping motor
A8
X11 “All Digital” version) INPUT
18V∼
IN0…IN31 X3A
PCB X44 X59 – M10: Cross subdivision motor Spot Film Device
X25 X75–S32:Anticoll.Main/Middle beam
X0 X13 I19…I29 24V∼
IN32…IN59 A2 X15 A11 Emergency switch
ENC_A X3B O60…O63 INPUT Inter- X77–S46-47:Table Top Emerg.switches
I33…I37 ENC_B
OUT64…OUT71
A12 X46 connection X78–S48-49:Main beam Emerg.switches
A10 ENC_A TPU0..TPU3
X14 A2
SFD ENC_B X17 Inter- PCB X81–S54-55:Middle beam Emerg.switches
IA0…IA15 INPUT
+5V ENC
connection (located on
+5V ENC X4
base) X83–R1:Main beam pot.
Vref Pot PCB
I0…I10 A2 X21 X47 – Enable for K2-K3-K4-K5
A12 X15 X5A OUT0…OUT39 X84–R3:Middle beam pot.
INPUT A2 X20
X49 – K1L: table emergency INPUT X88–R11:Table Top pot.
O8, O9
X26 X92–Y1:Main beam brake
A10 IK1L, OK1L
X16 I39…I54
X5B OUT40…OUT71
SFD X93–Y3:Middle beam brake
O2…O6 X105 X96–M13:Table Top motor.

O10…O11 O36…O59 X27
A12 X17 I12…I17 O18…O21
O32…O35
KVA
X0
X97 X98 APOLLO Table
X6 TPU0…TPU3
VOUTA..VOUTD LUMN X74–Emergency switches circuit
INV. X18 I30…I32
ORS X28 28Vdc X104
A13
CONM
KVA Inter- X76–S44-45:SID Emergency switches
X1 10V∼ X48 A15
A10 connection X79–S50-51:Angulation Emerg.switches
SFD
X19 I12…I17 A3 Compressor
PCB
X2 10V∼ OUTPUT X29 PCB X99 (located on
X80–S52-53:Scanning Emerg.switches
PCB column) X82–R10:Compressor pot.
A11 X20 I12…I17 X24 24Vdc
X45 X85–R2:Angulation pot.
X107 18V∼ X86–R4:Scanning pot.

X45
X45
X87–R9:SID pot.
A12 X21 I12…I17 X8 X23
18V∼
36V∼ O0…O1 X70 –Main beam motor X89–S25:Tube at 0° position
X30
Collimator
X71 – Angulation motor
I11 X32 X32 USMC Inverter X90–S26-27:Compres.end-run switches
A2 X72 – Middle beam motor
U32…U35 X31 X69 X91–S28-29:I.I. lift end-run switches
INPUT I18b X22 X73 – Scanning motor
PCB X18 X94–Y2:Angulation brake
X95–Y4:Scanning brake
A2 X99–M11-14:SID,compressor motors
X0 INPUT
X100–S31:L/H speed change switch
APOLLO
1
CAN BUS
X41 – Foot switch
S.F. 24V∼
Interconnection diagram
Control Desk X42 – Hand switch Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Power supply diagram 2
Code 39849002 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Functional drawing 3
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 1 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 2 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 3 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 4 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 5 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 6 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 7 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 8 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 9 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 10 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 11 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 12 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 13 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 14 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 15 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 16 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 17 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 18 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849001 - Rev. 12 Page 19 of 19

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Cabinet layout 4
Code 83848060 - Rev. 4 (CE)
Page 1 of 1
Code 83848250 - Rev. 2 (C-CSA-US)

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB layout 5
Code 58838150 - Rev. 12 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 2 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 3 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 4 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 5 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 6 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 7 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 8 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A1 CPU PCB 6
wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 2 Page 9 of 9

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB layout 7
Code 58838152 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB 8
wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 5 Page 1 of 4

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB 8
wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 5 Page 2 of 4

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB 8
wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 5 Page 3 of 4

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A2 Input PCB 8
wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 5 Page 4 of 4

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB layout 9
Code 58838154 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 1 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 2 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 3 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 4 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
TOMO ANGLE 7░
TOMO ANGLE 20░
TOMO ANGLE 30░
TOMO ANGLE 45░
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 5 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 6 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 7 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A3 Output PCB 10
wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 4 Page 8 of 8

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A4 Spot Film Device 11
motor driver PCB layout
Code 58838156 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
motor driver PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0 Page 2 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
Code 39849031 - Rev. 0 Page 3 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A7 Filter PCB 13
schematic and layout
Code 58848154 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard 14
PCB layout
Code 58843050 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A8 Table keyboard 15
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849019 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB layout
Code 58833015 - Rev. 2 (CE)
Page 1 of 1
Code 58843054 - Rev.0 (C-CSA-US)

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849014 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 2

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849014 - Rev. 2 Page 2 of 2

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector 18
PCB layout
Code 58841050 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A11 Base unit connector 19
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849010 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector 20
PCB layout
Code 58848150 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A12 Cabinet connector 21
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849012 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector 22
PCB layout
Code 58843052 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A13 Angulation connector 23
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849021 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A14 Control desk – CPU 24
PCB layout
Code 58838158 - Rev. 4 Page 1 of 2

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A14 Control desk – CPU 24
PCB layout
Code 58838158 - Rev. 4 Page 2 of 2

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A14 Control desk CPU 25
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 2 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 3 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 4 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 5 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 6 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849033 - Rev. 1 Page 7 of 7

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A15 Compressor 26
PCB layout
Code 58848152 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
4,7ÁF 63V
0,1ÁF 2200ÁF 100ÁF 100ÁF
22ÁF 0,1ÁF
10ÁF
0,1ÁF
0,1ÁF
0,1ÁF
APOLLO
A15 Compressor 27
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
0.1ÁF 100V 100ÁF 100V
4.7ÁF
4.7ÁF 50V
47ÁF 47ÁF
4.7ÁF
0.1ÁF
1ÁF
APOLLO
A15 Compressor 27
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 Page 2 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
0.1ÁF
0.1ÁF
0.1ÁF
0.1ÁF
0.1ÁF
APOLLO
A15 Compressor 27
PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849016 - Rev. 0 Page 3 of 3

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A16 Additional Collimator 28
Filtres PCB layout
Code 58848156 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A16 Additional Collimator 29
Filtres PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849051 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
APOLLO
A17 Table Top Control PCB 30
layout and wiring diagram
Code 58846140 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
23 SPARE PARTS
1 – Electrical components
2 – Electrical cabinet and PCB’s inside the table
3 – Connections cables
4 – Control desk
5 – Keyboard (TSO)
6 – Foot control
7 – Tabletop movement
movement
8 – Compressor group
9 – Spot Film Device – Cassette movement
10 – Spot Film Device – Shutters / Grid group
11 – Spot Film Device – Gripping group
12 – Spot Film Device – Cross division group
13 – Tabletop
14 – Collimator
15 – Covers
16 – Curved tabletop accessories
17 – Flat tabletop accessories

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
1 – ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Ref. Order code Description Note
M2 6684420100 Angulation motor CE version

6684422100 Angulation motor C-CSA-US
version
M5 6283310700 DX cassette movement motor
with Encoder
-- 6283310300 Encoder assy
M6 6283310600 SX cassette movement motor
M7 6283317400 Grid motor assy
M8 6283314900 Shutters motor assy
M9 6683304400 Gripping motor
M10 6683331300 Cross division motor assy
M12 6684250100 I.I. lift motor assy
M13 6684613100 Tabletop movement motor
M14 6684708800 Compressor motor assy
R2, R5, R6, 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
R7, R8, R11
R10 4192005200 Linear potentiometer 1.7K
S25 4233104900 Ball-microswitch
S26, S27 4208404000 Microswitch
S28, S29 4233104900 Ball-microswitch
S30 4291309400 XGG12-88Z1 UL/CSA
microswitch
S31 4291308400 “Crouzet” microswitch
S33 4291307800 “Crouzet” microswitch
S44, S45 4233104900 Ball-microswitch CE version
4291309000 Microswitch C-CSA-US
version
S50 4208404000 Microswitch CE version
4291309200 UL/CSA microswitch C-CSA-US
version
S51 4291308400 “Crouzet” microswitch CE version
4291309100 UL/CSA microswitch C-CSA-US
version

S44 S31 M14
S26
S45
(Rev. 3)
S25
Spare Parts
R10
S30
SERVICE MANUAL
S27
S51
M13 S50
R11
23-3
R8
M7
M2
M5
M12
R2
S28
S29
M8
R5
R7 M10
M6
R6 S33
M9
APOLLO
SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
M1 4391107900 Main beam actuator motor
M3 4391107800 Middle beam actuator motor
-- 6684108600 Main beam/Middle beam CE version

actuator end-travel group
6684108700 Main beam/Middle beam C-CSA-US version

actuator end-travel group
M4 4391106700 Scan motor CE version

4391107700 Scan motor C-CSA-US version
M11 6684413100 SID motor Version with SID

1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6684413800 SID motor Version with SID

1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
R1, R3, R4, 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg

R9
S32 4265712600 “Crouzet” microswitch CE version

4291309300 UL/CSA microswitch C-CSA-US version
S46, S47, 4233104900 Ball-microswitch CE version

S48, S54
4291309000 Ball-microswitch C-CSA-US version
S52, S53 4291308400 “Crouzet” microswitch
-- 6684112000 Fuses kit

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
R1
S54
M1
R3
S48
M11
M3
R9
S32
S47
S46
M4
R4
S53
S52

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
2 – ELECTRICAL CABINET and PCBs INSIDE THE TABLE
A1 5883815000 CPU board A1

A2 5883815200 Input board A2
A3 5883815400 Output board A3
A4 5883815600 Spot Film Device motor drive
board A4
A5, A6 4492706800 Inverter Mitsubishi
A7 5884815400 Filter board A7
A12 5884815000 Cabinat connector board A12
A15 5884815200 Compressor board A15
A16 5884815600 Additional Collimator Filters
board A16
K1L 4291512300 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz
(4 NO + 1NO) K1L
K2M, K3M, 4291517300 3-phases power rele 24V
K4M, K5M 50/60Hz with filter
(3 NO / 1 NC + 2 NC) K2M, K3M,
K4M, K5M
K6M, K7M, 4291514200 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz with
K8M, K9M filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 4 NC) K6M,
K7M, K8M, K9M
K10M, 4291505400 Rele 2 contact 7A 24Vac K10M,
K11M K11M
-- 4571810600 Rele socket
Z1 4192211300 3-phases filter 440Vac – 10A
Z34, Z35 4192207100 1-phase filter 0.5uF 100ohm
160Vac Z34, Z35
Q1 4291511700 3-phases breaker 6.3-10A Q1
V1, V2, V3 4165121100 Rectifier 25A 200V
V1, V2, V3
T1 4492821600 3-phases screened transformer CE version
6kVA
4492821700 3-phases screened transformer C-CSA-US
6kVA version
T2 4492820900 1-phase transformer 140VA
R15 4192109400 0.68ohm – 50W resistor
A10 (*) 5883301500 Spot Film Device board A10 CE version
5884305400 Spot Film Device board A10 C-CSA-US
version
A11 (*) 5884105000 Base unit connector board A11
A13 (*) 5884305200 Angulation connector board A13
A17 (*) 5884614000 Table Top Control board A17
(*) Inside Apollo table

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
3 – CONNECTION CABLES
X0-X74 6284821000 Emergency switch cable X0-X74
X0-X99 6284820900 SID motor cable X0-X99
X0-X101 6284820600 Emergency red button cable

X0-X101
X8 6284821400 Console cable X8
X14 6284820300 SFD signal cable X14
X16 6284820400 TSO cable X16
X19 6284820200 SFD potentiometer cable X19
X20 6284820700 Table potentiometer cable X20
X44 6284820500 SFD power cable X44
X45 6284821300 Collimator cable X45
X46 6284820800 Board connection cable X46
X68 6284820100 SFD motor cable X68
X99 6284821100 Compressor motor cable X99
X105 6284821200 Board connection cable 105
10 6284821500 Ground cable N.10

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
4 – CONTROL
CONTROL DESK
3
(7x)
-- 8384800000 Control desk assy
1 6684802300 Policarbonate skin
2 6184801500 Joystick plate assy
3 6684802400 Knob for joystick (7x)
-- 5883815800 Control desk CPU board A14

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
5 – KEYBOARD (TSO)
-- 6284320600 Table Keyboard A8 assy
1 5884305000 Keyboard PCB
2 6684320400 Keyboard skin assy

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
6 – FOOT CONTROL
-- 7184806000 Foot control assy
-- 4291419400 Fluoro switch (2 microswitches)
-- 4291419500 Exposure switch (4 microswitches)
-- 6284806600 Connection cable
-- 2300934200 Cable protection

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
7 – TABLE TOP MOVEMENT
3
2
6
5
1 4990806200 Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340
2 5284610400 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26
4 5284612000 Toothed pulley M1-Z100
5 6690806300 Open toothed belt 16 AT5
6 6684613600 Belt pulley intermediate assy

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
1 4990806200 Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340
5 6690806300 Open toothed belt 16 AT5
6 6184613600 Belt pulley intermediate assy

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
8 – COMPRESSOR GROUP
M14 6684708800 Compressor motor assy
S26, S27 4208404000 UP/DOWN switch
S31 4291308400 Parking switch
S30 4291309400 Compressor force switch
R10 4192005200 Linear potentiometer 1.7K
1 2100262400 Compressor spring
2 4890311000 Cable chain
3 6684704600 Compressor cup assy

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
S31
M14
S26
R10
S27 S30

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
9 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CASSETTE MOVEMENT
1 6183309500 Tensioning pulley for cass.

movement
2 4990806100 Toothed belt T5x14 L=1925mm
3 5283308200 Sliding bar
4 4990805700 Closed toothed belt T5x12

L=600mm
5 6683309200 Rear pulley assy
6 5283307700 Driving toothed pulley
7 6683310000 Optical sensors with cable kit
M5 6283310700 DX cassette movement motor with

Encoder
-- 6283310300 Encoder
M6 6283310600 SX cassette movement motor
8 6283323600 Light receiver with cable
9 6283323700 Light emitter with cable
10 6684322600 Leaf spring assembly

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
M5
5
7
6
3
4
1
M6
8
10
2

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
10 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – SHUTTERS / GRID GROUP
Ref.

L=215mm

L=200mm

L=220mm
M7 6283314900 Shutters motor assy
M8 6283317400 Grid motor assy
-- 6690805500 Open toothed belt kit T5x8

(gripping, shutters, grid)

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
3
1
M7
2
M8

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
11 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – GRIPPING GROUP
R6
M9
S33
-- 7183300000 Gripping assy
M9 6683304400 Gripping motor assy
S33 4291307800 Microswitch “Crouzet”
R6 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
1 5783301200 Gripping spring

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
12 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CROSS DIVISION GROUP
R7
M10

L=840mm
M10 6683331300 Cross division motor assy
R7 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
13 – TABLETOP
1 7184600600 Curved plastic tabletop
2 7184600000 Curved carbon fibre tabletop
3 7184600700 Flat plastic tabletop

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
14 – COLLIMATOR
-- 8611005100 Automatic collimator with

square/rectangular field (Villa model)
1 5811227000 Push button collimator panel board
(for Villa model collimator)
2 4591606700 Halogen lamp 24V 100W (for Villa
model collimator)
3 4192004000 Potentiometer 10k – 3gg (for Villa
model collimator)
4 4391103000 Collimator motor 24V (for Villa model
collimator)
5 5911310900 Collimator plexiglas cover (for Villa
model collimator)
-- 8611005800 Automatic collimator with
square/rectangular field (Ralco model)
-- 8611005000 Automatic collimator with CE version
square/rectangular field and Iris
-- 8611006100 Automatic collimator with C-CSA-US
square/rectangular field and Iris version

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
15 – COVERS
a 6684507200 SFD upper cover CE version

6684507300 SFD upper cover C-CSA-US version
b 6684500700 SFD front cover
c 6684508100 SFD left lateral cover Version with SID
1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6684503600 SFD left lateral cover Version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
d 6684508000 SFD right lateral cover Version with SID
1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6684503500 SFD right lateral cover Version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
e 6684506900 SFD lower cover Version with SID
1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6684507100 SFD lower cover Version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
f 5684504000 Base front cover
g1, g2 5484508200 Scanning cover
h 5484503200 Base left/right lateral cover
i 5484501400 Tabletop support arm front cover
k1 5484500400 SFD left rear cover
k2 5484500500 SFD right rear cover
l 6684505400 Angulation cover Version with SID
1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
5684325800 Angulation cover Version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
m1 5684434700 X-ray tube left lower cover
m2 5684434800 X-ray tube right lower cover
n 6684434600 X-ray tube main cover
o 5484504000 Tabletop arm front cover
p 6684506400 I.I. lift cover Version with SID
1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6684507400 I.I. lift cover Version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
g1
h
g2
i
m2
m1
f
n
l
k2
p
k1
d
b
e
c
a

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
q 5484500100 SID rear cover Version with SID

1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
6184504700 SID rear cover Version with SID

1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
r 5484500300 Column rear cover Version with SID

1000 ÷ 1500 mm
(39.4" ÷ 59.1")
5484501000 Column rear cover Version with SID

1100 ÷ 1800 mm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
s 5484502600 Rear cables junction upper cover
t 5484502500 Rear cables junction lower cover
u1 5684502700 Scanning rear left cover
u2 5684502800 Scanning rear right cover
v1 5684504300 Base left rear cover
v2 5684504200 Base right rear cover
w 5684232300 Cables chains junction bracket
z 5684108200 Cables output cover

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
v2
v
v1
r
t
q
z
u2
u1
u

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
16 – CURVED TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
3 2
4 5
1 7184621100 Headrest
2 6184626600 Patient support handgrip (1 pc.)
3 7184622900 Block patient footrest
4 7184623200 Legrest (2 pcs.)
5 7184624300 Band-tensioner with compression

band
6 7184626200 Lateral cassette holder

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts
17 – FLAT TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
2
3
4
5
1 7173151000 Headrest
2 6173120000 Patient support handgrip (1 pc.)
3 7184626500 Block patient footrest
4 8173142500 Legrest (2 pcs.)
5 7173129000 Band-tensioner with compression

band
6 7173115000 Lateral cassette holder

SERVICE MANUAL
Spare Parts

Code 6984900703_Rev.8 0051
Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.

Via Delle Azalee, 3
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Tel. (+39) 02 48859.1
Fax (+39) 02 4881844

Apollo Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apollo Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APOLLO 0051

Version 30 April 2008 (Rev. 8)

Rev. Date Page/s Modification description

0 14.01.05 - Document approval.

3 14.04.06 All Release of "All Digital" version.

4 17.07.06 from 4-2 to 4-6, 4-8, Release of SW version 1.06 on cabinet

5 25.10.06 11-5, 11-6, 11-7 Release of SW version 1.07 on cabinet

Rev. Date Page/s Modification description

6 20.06.07 from i to vi, 3-6, Release of SW version 1.08 on cabinet

7 10.09.07 from i to vi, 4-2, 4-3, Release of SW version 1.10 on cabinet

2 SAFETY ASPECTS 2-1

4 TECHNICAL DATA 4-1

6.5 Machine cable connection .................................................................. 6-12

7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE 7-1

8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION 8-1

9 CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF

10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA 10-1

10.1.7 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment

11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS

12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC 12-1

(Rev. 7) iii APOLLO

14 OPERATING MODE 14-1

15 EMERGENCY END RUN 15-1

16 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT 16-1

17 THREE-PHASE INVERTER 17-1

17.3 Inverter software parameters setting.................................................. 17-3

18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS 18-1

19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS 19-1

20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 20-1

21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING 21-1

22 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS 22-1

23 SPARE PARTS 23-1

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to

The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures

Apollo is an electromedical equipment and, as such, it can be used

The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements

1.1 Symbols used in this manual

Indicates a “NOTE”; please pay particular attention when reading the

Indicates a “WARNING”; topics identified by this symbol refer to the

(Rev. 3) 1-1 APOLLO

1.2 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical

For any technical queries please contact the following:

APOLLO 1-2 (Rev. 3)

Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in

Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for:

Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide

Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the

(Rev. 3) 2-1 APOLLO

The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours,

In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion, avoid the

Before cleaning the equipment, always ensure it is disconnected from the

All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic

Before activating motorised parts, such as the tilting, the tabletop,

Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.

Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from

APOLLO 2-2 (Rev. 3)

R.F. source power Distance (m)

Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in

Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment:

(Rev. 3) 2-3 APOLLO

Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres.